Owners Manual
2013
OWNER’S MANUAL
Town & Country
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby
:
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and
equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This
manual may also include a description of features and equipment
that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use
public transportation.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its
products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them
on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink
and then drive.
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby
:
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
your satisfaction.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears stamped on
the right sliding door sill under the sill moulding and
printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label
affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Vehicle Identification Number
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . .
䡵 SENTRY KEY威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped
. . . . . . . . . .29
. . . . . . . . . .30
. . . . . . . . . .34
. . . . . . . . . .34
. . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .20 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Using The RKE Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Power Vent Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . .42
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 SLIDING SIDE DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .72
▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped . . . . . .49
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock . . . . . .53
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .69
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Air Bag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .80
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .84
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
䡵 COMMERCIAL CARGO VEHICLES (NO FACTORY 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLED REAR SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED . . .115
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Restraining Infants And Small Children In
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commercial Cargo Vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .119
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .119
. .119
. .120
. .121
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly to
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three
with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent 1 — OFF
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START 2 — ACCESSORY
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. 3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
2
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the lower
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
into the lock cylinder with either side up.
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Power window switches will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening the front door will cancel this feature.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when
the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
SENTRY KEY姞
Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronor unlocked.
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature, opening the
driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition switch is placed
in ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped) will cause the
reminder chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote as possible by an authorized dealer.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authoReplacement Keys
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the is one that has never been programmed.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer syscannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle.
tem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the
authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm
provides both audible and visible signals, for the first
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
three minutes, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps
performed at an authorized dealer.
and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Light
General Information
will flash repeatedly and the horn will sound. For an
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15 additional 15 minutes, only the headlights, park lamps
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is and/or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.
subject to the following conditions:
Rearming Of The System
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15
• This device must accept any interference that may be additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security
received, including interference that may cause unde- Light flashing, if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been
disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
sired operation.
present, the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
Customer Key Programming
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
(RKE) transmitter.
further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, 3. If any doors are open, close them.
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙.
To Disarm The System
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the the following methods:
key is physically removed from the ignition.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
vehicle:
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
Vehicle Security Alarm.
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door the alarm will sound.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the NOTE:
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courSecurity System Manual Override
tesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in
the “Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
Tamper Alert
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
• The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in liftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur- liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding
door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
ther information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The Using The RKE Transmitter
RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the Three-button RKE transmitters will provide basic UNvehicle to activate the system.
LOCK, LOCK and PANIC functions.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
RKE transmitters.
Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle.
Vehicles built without the powered options will be
equipped from the factory with three-button RKE transmitters, and those built with power options will be
equipped with up to seven-button RKE transmitters.
Key Fob With Three-Button RKE Transmitter
Seven-button RKE transmitters will provide functions
that allow the same basic operation as the three-button,
but may also be used to operate the power liftgate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
(optional), power sliding doors, Remote Start feature
(optional). Some features can be programmed to the
customers preferences. For example, flash headlights or
sound horn on LOCK.
Remote Unlock Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s side or twice to
unlock all doors and liftgate. This will also turn on the
Illuminated Entry system.
Remote Key Unlock On First Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s side, or all doors, on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter:
NOTE:
Key Fob With Seven-Button RKE Transmitter
• For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by performits previous setting.
ing the following steps:
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit1. Perform this operation while standing outside the ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
vehicle.
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
Security Alarm.
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK
Remote Lock Doors And Liftgate
button while still holding the LOCK button.
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans- signal.
mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and
the Key Fob removed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
holding the LOCK button.
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
Sound Horn With Remote Lock
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec- 4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by presstronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Unignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforremoved.
mation.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
its previous setting.
following steps:
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit1. Perform this operation while standing outside the ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
vehicle.
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Using The Panic Alarm
Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
Press the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitter
within five seconds to Open/Close the Power Liftgate. If
the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power
closed, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the overhead
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second console.
time or if the vehicle is driven above 5 mph (8 km/h).
If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear
NOTE:
pillar, pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only.
The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch.
• When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the
PANIC button a second time, you may have to move If the vehicle is locked and Vehicle Security Alarm is
closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF) armed, using RKE transmitter to open the power liftgate
noises of the system.
does not unlock the vehicle or disarm the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
• The Panic Alarm cannot be activated if the engine is
running.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Open/Close Left Power Sliding Door — If
Equipped
RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being powerclosed, the door will reverse to the full open position.
Press the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on the
RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
Close the Left Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being
power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open
position.
If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, pressing the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button
twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Vehicle Security Alarm.
Turn Off Flash Lights With RKE Lock — If
Equipped
If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
armed, pressing the LEFT Power Sliding Door button
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmittwice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Veter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
hicle Security Alarm.
the current setting, proceed as follows:
Power Open/Close Right Power Sliding Door — If
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “ElecEquipped
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Press the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on the
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “UnRKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforClose the Right Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
mation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitfollowing steps:
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
vehicle.
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed Alarm.
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
Programming Additional Transmitters
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
contact your authorized dealer for details.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans- The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and battery.
the Key Fob removed.
NOTE:
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
its previous setting.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
housing or the printed circuit board.
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
the seal during removal.
latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot
Emergency Key Removal
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
Separating RKE Transmitter
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. • Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
reduce this range.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers.
Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch
a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the • Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go™)
engine will Remote Start:
WARNING!
• Shift lever in PARK
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
To Enter Remote Start Mode
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
lights will flash and horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
NOTE:
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
• The park lights will turn on and remain on during
to the ON/RUN position.
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The engine can be started times (two 15 minutes
cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition switch must be cycled by pushing the START/
STOP button twice (or the ignition switch must be
cycled to the ON/RUN position).
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button. If the
START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the
ON/RUN position.
To Enter The Vehicle After Remote Start
NOTE:
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Remote Start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. After the
Turn to ON” will flash in the EVIC until you insert the
vehicle is unlocked, you can enter the vehicle, press and
Key Fob. Once inserted, the message “Remote Start
release the START/STOP button (or insert the Key Fob
Active - Key To Run⬙ will display in the EVIC until you
into the ignition switch and move it to the ON/RUN
insert and turn the key to the ON/RUN position.
position), otherwise the engine will shut off at the end of
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N15- minute cycle.
Go™ feature, the ignition switch must be in the
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release • For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-Nthe UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
Go™ feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Key
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
To Run” will display in the EVIC until you insert and • The hazard switch is pressed
turn the key to ON/RUN position. Refer to “Electronic
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for further
• The brake pedal is pressed
information.
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ • The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15-minute
cycle
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push
Start Button” will display in the EVIC until you push
To Turn Off The Engine While In Remote Start
the START/STOP button.
Mode
Cancel Remote Start
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
occur:
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in the
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm
Remote Start Mode, the system will not allow the Remote
Start button to shut down the engine for two seconds
• Any engine warning lights come on
after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
• Fuel lamp turns on
• The hood is opened
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When To Reset Remote Start
The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
failed start, where the Remote Starting sequence was
initiated but the engine stopped cranking without starting. After either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle
Security Alarm system is alarming, or if the PANIC
button was pressed, the vehicle must be reset by cycling
the START/STOP button to the ON/RUN position.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Manual Door Lock
Lock the front doors by pushing down on the lock knobs If the lock knob is rearward when you shut either side
sliding door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are
on each door trim panel.
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
If the lock knob is down when you shut either front door,
the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING!
Sliding Door Lock
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the
ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
remove the Key Fob.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
If you press the power door lock switch while the Key
Front Passenger Power Door Switches
Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the
1 - Window Open/Close
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from 2 - Power Door Locks
accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
operate if there is any manual operation of the power
door is open, the sliding door will lock.
door locks (lock or unlock).
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic VeWhen enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
hicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: Use the Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If
(24 km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit
Equipped
features in accordance with local laws.
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
will occur only after the shift lever has been shifted into The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
the PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
shift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doors feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
closed).
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
• If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for an
extended period of time, the Passive Entry feature for
the handle may time out. Pulling the deactivated front
door handle will reactivate the door handle’s Passive
Entry feature.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If you unlock the doors using the Passive Entry door
handles, but do NOT pull the handle, the doors will
automatically lock after 60 seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob
present in the ignition.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outNOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter The Liftgate
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, cycle the handle to open the liftgate within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
four doors.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in EVIC, all doors will unlock when you the liftgate Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st press⬙ is programmed handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
in EVIC, the liftgate will unlock when you cycle the
liftgate handle. For further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”. All doors will remain
locked when the liftgate release handle is pressed regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st
Press”).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
WINDOWS
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
Power Vent Windows — If Equipped
The Power Vent Window Switch located on the driver’s
door trim panel allows the driver to operate the two vent
windows from the driver’s seat.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Power Vent Window Switch Open/Close
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain active
You can control either the front or rear windows using for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
switches located on the driver’s door trim panel. The turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.
switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay.
Power Windows
Driver’s Power Window Switches
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped
Front Passenger Power Window Switch
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by There is a single switch on the front passenger’s door
depressing the bar switch just below the power window trim panel which operates the passenger door window
switches.
and a set of switches that lock and unlock all doors. The
switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay.
Power Window Lockout Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped
The front window switches may be equipped with an
Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch past the
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
part way and release it when you want the window to
stop.
Front Passenger Power Door Switches
The power window switches remain active for up to 10
minutes (depending on the accessory delay setting) after
the ignition switch has been turned to OFF. Opening a
vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
1 - Window Open/Close
2 - Power Door Locks
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
The front driver and front passenger switches may be
first detent and hold to close window manually.
equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window
switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and the
WARNING!
window will go up automatically.
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
NOTE:
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following
steps after vehicle power is restored:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
switch again to close the window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
2
Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch — If
Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
door window by a single switch on the door handle
assembly.
The switches will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.
Sliding Door Power Window Switch
NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open,
NOTE: The switches will not operate if the driver has stopping several inches above the window sill.
activated the Power Window Lockout.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
To keep your door operating properly, observe the following guidelines:
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the • Always open the door smoothly.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the • Avoid high impacts against the door stop when openwindows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
ing the door. This is very important when your vehicle
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occuris parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in
rence and can be minimized. If the rear windows are
the downhill direction.
open and buffeting occurs, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the • There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunsliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
SLIDING SIDE DOOR
exterior handle.
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by anytime the vehicle is in motion.
rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle backwards opens the door and rocking forward releases the
hold open latch in order to close the door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
fuel door.
Press the button on the RKE transmitter twice within 5
seconds to open a power sliding door. When the door is
fully open, pressing the button twice within 5 seconds a
second time will close the door.
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
There are power sliding side door switches located on the
b-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door
for the rear seat passengers and in the overhead console
for the driver and passengers. Pressing the switch once
will open the power sliding door. If the switch is pressed
while the door is under a power cycle, the door will
reverse direction.
The power sliding door may be opened or
closed manually or by using the buttons on the
RKE transmitter, overhead console switch, or
rear door switch. Pulling the inside or outside
power sliding door handle will also power open or close
the power sliding door.
NOTE: Pulling the outside power sliding door handle a
second time while the sliding door is power opening or
power closing will allow the sliding door to be opened or
closed manually.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlocked If the inside or outside door handles are used while the
before the power sliding door switches will operate.
power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding
door feature will be canceled and will go into manual
mode.
To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
doors from the rear seats, press the power sliding door
master lock button, located in the overhead console, to
disable the switches and handles for the rear seat passengers.
NOTE:
Power Sliding Door Switch
• The power sliding side door switches will not open the
power sliding door if the shift lever is in gear or the
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). To close the
power sliding door with the shift lever in gear and
vehicle speed at 0 mph (0 km/h), the brake must be
pressed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while
it is closing or opening, the door will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
WARNING!
You, or others, could be injured if caught in the path
of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear
before closing the door.
• If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or
close position, it will fully open when a power sliding Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash
door switch is pressed. To close the door, wait until it
The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for 12
is fully open and then press the switch again.
seconds when either sliding door is opened. This will
• If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc- alert other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could be
tions within the same cycle, the system will automati- entering or exiting the vehicle.
cally stop, the power sliding door motor will make a
clicking sound until the door has no further move- The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or
ment. This clicking sound can be stopped by pulling disabled by performing the following procedure:
the inside or outside handle. If this condition occurs, 1. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch.
no damage is done to the power sliding door motor.
The power sliding door must be opened or closed 2. Cycle the ignition switch from ON/RUN to OFF five
times ending in the ON/RUN position (do not start
manually.
the engine).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the HAZARD switch ON.
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming.
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the
previous procedure.
Power Sliding Side Door Master Lock Switch
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the second row sliding door switches
and handles may be overridden by pressing the OFF side
Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Master Switch
of the Master Lock Out Switch located in the front
overhead console.
1 — Left Sliding Door
3 — Right Sliding Door
4 — Master Lock
When the power sliding door master lock switch is in the 2 — Liftgate
OFF position, the power sliding side door may not be
opened or closed by pressing the switch located on the
b-pillar trim panel, just in front of the sliding door or
activating the inside power sliding door handle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
Child Protection Door Lock system.
2
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
Child Protection Door Lock
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
(toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection
Door Lock.
NOTE:
• After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, always
test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the
desired position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged, (even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position) the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches
on the overhead console or the switches located on the
trim panel just in front of the power sliding door.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened
from the outside door handle or the switches located
on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding
door when the Child Protection Door Locks are
engaged.
• The power sliding side door will operate from the
switches located on the b-pillar trim panel, just in front
of the power sliding door, regardless of the Child To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
Protection Door Lock lever position. To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding door from 1. Open the sliding side door.
the rear seats, press the “OFF” Master Lock Out 2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward
Switch located in the front overhead console, next to
(away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Prothe driver.
tection Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (if
equipped).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
• The power sliding door will operate from the outside
door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches on the
• After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system,
overhead console, or the switches located on the
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
b-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding
is in the desired position.
door when the shift lever is in PARK, regardless of the
• The power sliding side door switches will not open the
child lock lever position.
power sliding doors if the vehicle is in gear or the
LIFTGATE
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with power locks, the liftgate can
be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter button, or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To open the liftgate, press the liftgate release handle Power Liftgate — If Equipped
located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
the button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Press the button on the transmitter twice within five
seconds, to open the power liftgate. When the liftgate is
fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds,
a second time, will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
pressing the button located on the overhead console.
Liftgate Handle Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
Overhead Console Master Power Switch
Rear Power Liftgate Switch
When the RKE transmitter button is pressed and the
1 — Left Door
3 — Right Door
Flash Lights feature is enabled, the tail lights will flash
2 — Liftgate
4 — Master Lock
and several audible beeps will occur to signal that the
The power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button,
liftgate is opening or closing.
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening.
Pushing once will only close the liftgate. This button
cannot be used to open the liftgate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
• During power operation, whether liftgate is fully open
or fully closed, the liftgate chime will beep several
times indicating power operation is in progress.
• The power liftgate must be in the full open or close
positions for any of the buttons to operate. If the
liftgate is not in the full open or close positions, it must
be opened or closed manually.
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is • If the liftgate release button is activated while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
full open position.
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shift
lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
(0 km/h).
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open • The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
position.
below −12°F (−24°C) or temperatures above 143°F
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
(62°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power However, because the gas pressure drops with temperaliftgate buttons.
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
stop and must be opened or closed manually.
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front
passenger
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint) — if equipped
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Please pay close attention to the information in this
that span the front, second, and third row seating for section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
the driver and passengers seated next to a window
possible.
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
wheel
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
• Knee bolster for front passenger seat occupant
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
CHildren (LATCH).
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s and third row
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
center) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs),
severity and type of collision.
which lock the seat belt webbing into position by
extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting
the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or
secure a large item in a seat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
their arm.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
buckled up in a rear seat.
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
between you and the door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder
belts.
The belt webbing in the retractor is designed to lock
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the
far away from home or on your own street.
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the
front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the belt to go around your lap.
WARNING!
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
Pulling Out Belt and Latch Plate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
Removing Slack From Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Pull the strap down and secure the small latch plate of
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi- the lap belt into the small buckle until you hear a “click”.
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
comfortable and not resting on your neck. When the belt
is long enough to fit , insert the large latch plate into the
WARNING!
buckle until you hear a “click.” The retractor should
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and withdraw any slack in the belt.
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system To release the small latch plate, position the end of the
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. large latch plate against the red button on the small latch
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do plate and push upward. Reinstall the latch plates into the
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt headliner.
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
etc.).
In the front seats and the second row outboard seats, the
shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or
downward to help position the belt away from your
The shoulder belt for the third row center seat is located neck. The upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by
in the headliner slightly behind the third row seat.
Third Row Center Shoulder Belt Instructions
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
pushing anywhere on the anchorage. To move the an- you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
chorage downward, squeeze the actuation buttons while anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
simultaneously pushing down on the anchorage assem- it is locked in position.
bly.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or
a cinching latch plate which are used to secure a child
restraint system. For additional information refer to
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
under the “Child Restraint” section. The chart below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
Adjustable Anchorage
First Row
Second Row
Third Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
ALR
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average • N/A — Not Applicable
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Center
N/A
N/A
Cinch
Passenger
ALR
ALR
ALR
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
years old and under should always be properly reALR and is being used for normal usage:
strained in the rear seat.
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Seat Belt Pretensioners
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Refurther reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretencollision.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severwhether the severity, or type of rear impact will require ity and type of the impact.
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
AHR In Reset Position
NOTE:
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
into the back decorative plastic half.
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins after the vehicle secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deacOnce the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire tivating BeltAlert威.
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occuBeltAlert威) seat belt remains unfastened.
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
WARNING!
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
panel below the steering column.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag
2 — Knee Bolster
This vehicle is equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC • Air Bag Warning Light
air bags are located above the side windows and their • Steering Wheel and Column
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
• Instrument Panel
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The • Knee Impact Bolster
SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
NOTE:
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
authorized dealer immediately.
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
Air Bag System Components
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
WARNING!
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats
“ONLY”.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
• Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their
body outside of the window.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
Knee Impact Bolster
The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the
front passenger, and position the front occupant for the
best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee
Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
improved protection for the driver and front passenger. collisions depending on several factors, including the
Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,
occupant protection.
or rollover collisions.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system including some that may produce substantial vehicle
required for this vehicle.
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
bags, SABs, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and initial deceleration.
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
several factors, including the severity and type of impact. Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
have deployed.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colliLight in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
comes on again after initial startup.
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A
large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover
separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to
inflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates in about
15 to 20 milliseconds. The Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in
the side of the air bag.
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are During collisions where the impact is confined to a
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
collision.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the followBecause air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, ing functions:
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of Cut off fuel to the engine.
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and until the ignition key is turned off.
SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the
Front And Side Impact Sensors
battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
Unlock the doors automatically.
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
immediately after deployment.
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
the air bag system.
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s inor all of the following may occur:
structions for cleaning.
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have defront passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those bags will not be in place to protect you.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
If A Deployment Occurs
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Air Bag Warning Light
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check
the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located
on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag
fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Child Restraints
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children who are two years old or younger
and who have not reached the height or
weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
out-grown the height or weight limit of
their booster seat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a fivepoint Harness, facing forward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rear
seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
or behind their back.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
Second Row Bench
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Second Row Captains Chairs
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
No
N/A
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system to
attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
Can two child restraints be attached
using a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints. If
the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of
the front passenger seat if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint
owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes; second row outboard positions
only, third row all positions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
2
LATCH Anchorages
(Third Row 60/40 Anchorages Shown)
LATCH Anchorages
(Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
In addition, there are tether strap anchors lo- Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
cated behind each rear seatback, near to the anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
floor.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH – Commercial Cargo Vehicles
(No Factory Installed Rear Seats) — If Equipped
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
If the selected seating position has a Switchable AutoRestraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direcmatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
tions to attach a tether anchor.
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacposition has.
turer’s instructions.
Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
anchorages.
in any direction.
Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
restraint to get a better fit.
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
ing position.
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
1.
2.
3.
4.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and
the following sections for more information about both
types of seat belts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
2
Second Row Bench
Second Row Captains Chair
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Yes
Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Yes; second row outboard positions only, third row all positions.
Yes
In positions with cinching latch
plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do
not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbetter fit.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
against the child seat.
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
attach a tether anchor.
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
in any direction.
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
vehicle seat.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chilposition. For some second row seats, you may need to
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get
attach a tether anchor.
a better fit.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
in any direction.
path.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Anchorage — Second Row Captains Chairs
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconbetter access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
tether anchorage for that seating position (see the
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
charts above), move the child restraint to another
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
position in the vehicle if one is available.
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
restraint.
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
side of the head restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
LATCH Anchorages
(Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown)
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
(Second Row Anchorage Shown)
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115
COMMERCIAL CARGO VEHICLES (NO FACTORY
INSTALLED REAR SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a
family vehicle and are not intended for carrying children
in the front passenger seat. However, if you must carry a
child in a vehicle without a rear seat, the passenger seat
should be moved to the full rearward position and the
child must be in a proper restraint system based on its
age, size and weight.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
NEVER carry a child in a rear facing infant carrier in
a vehicle without rear seats. In a collision, serious
injury or death may occur from the deploying passenger airbag.
Commercial Child Restraint Tether Anchor
This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether
anchor located on the lower rear of the front passenger
seat. Use this tether anchor to secure only forwardfacing child restraints equipped with an upper tether
strap.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117
WARNING!
Rearward-facing infant restraints must never be secured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a
passenger airbag. In a collision, a passenger airbag
may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants
riding in rearward-facing infant restraints.
Restraining Infants And Small Children In
Commercial Cargo Vehicles
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is
correct for your child:
• The forward-facing child seat is for children from
about 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and more than one year
old.
• A convertible child seat, one that is designed to be
used for children who are too heavy for a rearwardfacing infant seat, may be used IN THE FORWARD
FACING POSITION ONLY, IT MUST NEVER BE INSTALLED FACING TO THE REAR IN A COMMERCIAL CARGO VEHICLE. When a convertible seat is
properly installed facing forward, the vehicle seat
should be adjusted to the rear most position.
• Children more than 40 lbs (18 kg) should be secured in
the passenger seat in a child restraint or beltpositioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to the
rear most position. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled in the passenger seat with the
seat adjusted to the rearmost position. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or
under their arm.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Tether Installation For Commercial Cargo Vehicles
5. Following the child seat manufacturer’s instructions,
tighten the child restraint tether strap.
To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the
vehicle, follow the instructions shown:
6. Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks, abrasions,
discoloration, and loose threads. If these, or any other
1. Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lower
condition that might affect the performance of the
rear of the front passenger seat.
strap is observed, DO NOT USE. Contact your autho2. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
rized dealership for a replacement part.
for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the
extended tether strap.
WARNING!
3. Route the tether strap under the head rest.
NOTE: Ensure that the child restraint tether strap is
centered between the headrest supports underneath the
head rest.
4. Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether
strap, attach the child restraint tether strap to the
metal anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger
seat.
The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used with
a child restraint only. It should not be used for any
other purpose. Before use, inspect the tether anchor
strap for nicks, abrasions, discoloration, and loose
threads. If these or any other condition that might
affect the performance of the strap is observed, DO
NOT USE that strap. Personal injury may result.
Contact your authorized dealer for a replacement
part.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 119
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
CAUTION!
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- SAFETY TIPS
mental and should be avoided.
Transporting Passengers
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate AREA.
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
120 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 121
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- Air Bag Warning Light
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
The light should come on and remain on for
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
not lit during starting, see your authorized
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
122 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 123
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
124 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lights
Fluid Leaks
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .132
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .133
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . .136
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .137
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
䡵 Uconnect威 Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Uconnect威 Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster . . . .190
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . .192
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect威 Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .177
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Stow ’n Go威 Seating — If Equipped . . . . . . . .197
▫ Quad Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . . . .207
▫ Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped. . . . .208
▫ Third Row Power Folding Seat —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks. . . . . . . . .214
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .214
▫ Dimmer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat
(Available With Memory Seat ONLY). . . . . . . .218
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .219
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .221
▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . .222
▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .223
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ SmartBeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Battery Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS . . . . . .229
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Windshield Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Rear Wiper And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 䡵 PARKSENSE威 REAR PARK ASSIST —
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .231
▫ ParkSense威 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .233
▫ ParkSense威 Warning Display . . . . .
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ ParkSense威 Display . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF
. . . . . . . .240
. . . . . . . .241
. . . . . . . .241
. . . . . . . .242
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .235
▫ Enabling/Disabling ParkSense威 . . . . . . . . . . .245
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ Service The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense威 System . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ ParkSense威 System Usage Precautions . . . . . . .246
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 䡵 PARKVIEW威 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Turning ParkView威 On Or Off — With
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
▫ Turning ParkView威 On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .252
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ Front Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ Courtesy/Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only) . . . . . . .254
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button . .263
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .263
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights —
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . .
▫ Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped . . . . .256
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .257
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . .
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink威. . .259
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . .
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button . .263
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . .
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .262
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
. . . . . . . .266
. . . . . . . .267
. . . . . . . .268
. . . . . . . .268
. . . . . . . .268
. . . . . . . .268
. . . . . . . .268
. . . . . . . .269
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . .279
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Glove Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Door Trim Panel Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped . . . . . .281
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . .274
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
▫ Second Row Floor Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ Storage Bin Safety Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Instrument Panel Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
▫ Center And Rear Overhead Console
Storage — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Super Console — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Coat Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Premium Console Cupholders —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Cargo Area Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Interior Bottle Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
䡵 CONSOLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Basic Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Premium Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .289 䡵 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .297
▫ Super Console — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .293 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .297
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Deploying the Crossbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 䡵 SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .303
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
3
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) Equipped
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
WARNING!
mirror adjusts.
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging three detent positions:
the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
• full forward
mirror.
• full rearward and
• normal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select butThe power mirror controls are located on the driver-side tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
door trim panel.
mirror that you want to adjust.
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Left and Right side power mirror preselected positions
can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat
Feature. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Mirror Controls
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
rearward of the front doors. The driver’s outside mirror
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The driver’s
outside mirror will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt
Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerProgrammable Features” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to the normal driving position.
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
will automatically unfold.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Illuminated Mirror
Rear Detection Zones
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will • The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap- The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
proximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the contamination so that the BSM system can function
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumvehicles in these areas.
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
Sensor Locations
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
3
Overtaking/Approaching
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Opposing Traffic
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Underdriver is alerted using both the visual and audible standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
Blind Spot Alert
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the radio is muted.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the approis also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
RCP state always requests the chime.
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime Blind Spot Alert Off
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de- When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
tected object are present on the same side at the same or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
muted.
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used
NOTE:
Astronomy Zone — System Temporarily Unavailable
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system
system, the radio is also muted.
will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
display the message “ Blind spot system unavailablethe appropriate visual alert only.
Astronomy zone”. The side mirrors LED’s will be lit up
and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Uconnect威 Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
Uconnect威 Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle communications system. Uconnect威 Phone al- vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ The Uconnect威 Phone is driven through your Bluetooth威
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect威 features
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi- Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute different electronic devices to connect to each other
your radio when using the Uconnect威 Phone.
without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect威 Phone
works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be
NOTE: The Uconnect威 Phone requires a mobile phone
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile”, Veris turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect威 website for supUconnect威 Phone. The Uconnect威 Phone allows up to
ported phones.
seven mobile phones to be linked to the system. Only one
For Uconnect威 customer support, visit www.Uconnect- linked (or paired) mobile phone can be used with the
Phone.com or call 1–877–855–8400.
system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
Uconnect姞 Phone — IF EQUIPPED
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Command Button
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. All attention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect威 Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
button and Voice Com(Uconnect威 Phone
mand
button) that will enable you to
access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect威 followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect威 Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 mobile phone. See the
Uconnect威 website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
details.
The Uconnect威 Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect威 Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect威 Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect威
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect威 Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect威 Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the
Uconnect威 Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
Voice Command Tree
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威 Device”.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect威 Phone will play some of the
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the Uconnect威 Phone, simply press the The following are general phone to Uconnect威 Phone
button and follow the audible prompts for directions. pairing instructions:
Uconnect威 Phone sessions begin with a press of the
• Press the
button to begin.
button on the radio control head.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Cancel Command
“Device Pairing”.
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a • When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
and follow the audible prompts.
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to
Pair (Link) Uconnect威 Phone To A Mobile Phone
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
To begin using your Uconnect威 Phone, you must pair
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
after the initial pairing process.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer- • For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
give the Uconnect威 Phone a name for your mobile
Uconnect威 website may also provide detailed instrucphone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
tions for pairing.
given a unique phone name.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
phones to your Uconnect威 Phone. However, at any
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect威 System. The priority
allows the Uconnect威 Phone to know which mobile
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect威 Phone will use the priority three mobile
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
Dial By Saying A Number
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
• The Uconnect威 Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call”.
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previ“Dial”.
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect威 phonebook
• Press the
button to begin.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a • When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phoneUconnect威 Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
book entry, if desired.
• The Uconnect威 system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may • When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
appear in the display of certain radios.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect威 Phonebook is phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
main menu.
button to begin.
• Press the
The Uconnect威 Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
Add Names To Your Uconnect威 Phonebook
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
“Phonebook New Entry”.
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom- supported by your phone, Uconnect威 Phone automatimended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert” cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
instead of “Bob”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect威 Phone.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect威 Phone automatically downloads names (text • Depending on the maximum number of entries downnames) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availAccess Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect威
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availwebsite for supported phones.
able for use.
• To call a name from the Uconnect威 Phonebook or • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
phone is accessible.
by Saying a Name” section.
• Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded.
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect威 Phone, for example, after you • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect威 Phone. These can only be
start the vehicle.
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect威 Phone on the next
phone connection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
NOTE:
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended to the main menu.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
deleted or edited.
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
button to begin.
• Press the
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Entry” feature.
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
Delete Uconnect威 Phonebook Entry
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
entry that you wish to edit.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
button to begin.
• Press the
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
“Phonebook Delete”.
phonebook entry that you are editing.
Edit Uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
button while the
from the list, press the
Uconnect威 Phone is playing the desired entry and say
“Delete”.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
• The Uconnect威 Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect威 Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, • Note that only the phonebook in the current language
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
is deleted.
wish to delete.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
deleted or edited.
language is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List All Names In The Uconnect威 Phonebook
• Press the
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect威 Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
“Phonebook List Names”.
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
• The Uconnect威 Phone will play the names of all the accessed through the Uconnect威 Phone. Check with your
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone- mobile service provider for the features that you have.
book entries, if available.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
button to begin.
but- Currently In Progress
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
ton during the playing of the desired name, and say When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
“Call”.
Uconnect威 Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call.
button to accept the call. To reject the call,
Press the
operations at this point.
button until you hear a single beep,
press and hold the
• The Uconnect威 Phone will then prompt you as to the indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Conference Call” in this section.
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
button to place the current
mobile phone. Press the
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
butbring the call back from hold, press and hold the
NOTE: The Uconnect威 Phone compatible phones in the ton until you hear a single beep.
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
Toggling Between Calls
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
press the
button until you hear a single beep, indicatMaking A Second Call While Current Call Is In
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have
Progress
switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
button until you hear a
hold), press and hold the
and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Redial
Conference Call
Three-Way Calling
• Press the
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial”.
button to begin.
• The Uconnect威 Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect威 Phone.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
but- Call Continuation
ton. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the Uconnect威 Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail- Uconnect姞 Phone Features
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
Language Selection
• After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can To change the language that the Uconnect威 Phone is
continue on the Uconnect威 Phone either until the call using:
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
button to begin.
cessation of the call on the Uconnect威 Phone and • Press the
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
• After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue
English, Espanol, or Francais.
on the Uconnect威 Phone for a certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the • Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the
Uconnect威 Phone to the mobile phone.
language selection.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the mo- After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
bile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF.
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect威 Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and is usable across all languages.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Assistance
NOTE:
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is • The emergency number dialed is based on the country
reachable:
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
number for your area.
area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect威 Phone is
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
some systems. To do this, press the
button and say
follows:
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
button to begin.
• Press the
• The Uconnect威 Phone does slightly lower your
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
“Emergency” and the Uconnect威 Phone will instruct
for the mobile phone directly.
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
NOTE:
WARNING!
To use you Uconnect威 Phone System in an emergency, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect威 System,
• and have network coverage.
Roadside Assistance
If you need roadside assistance:
• The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the “Roadside
Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the Roadside Assistance references.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
button and say
some systems. To do this, press the
“Setup”,
followed
by
“Roadside
Assistance”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Roadside Assistance”.
Paging
• Press the
button to begin.
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect威 Phone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you
can press the
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”.
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
Saying
a
number,
or
sequence of numbers, followed by
with Automated Systems”.
“Send”, is also to be used for navigating through an
Working With Automated Systems
automated customer service center menu structure, and
This method is used in instances where one generally has to leave a number on a pager.
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while You can also send stored Uconnect威 phonebook entries as
navigating through an automated telephone system.
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
You can use your Uconnect威 Phone to access a voice mail entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
button and say, “Send.” The
system or an automated service, such as a paging service call and then press the
system
will
prompt
you
to
enter
the name or number and
or automated customer service line. Some services resay
the
name
of
the
phonebook
entry you wish to send.
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
The
Uconnect威
Phone
will
then
send the corresponding
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect威 Phone.
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
When calling a number with your Uconnect威 Phone that tones over the phone.
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the NOTE:
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
followed by the word “Send”. For example, if required to
network configurations. This is normal.
Voice Mail Calling
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
one of the following:
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect威 Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect威 Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect威 Phone
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
keypad and still use the Uconnect威 Phone (while dialing
button to begin.
• Press the
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile • Following the beep, say “Mute”.
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
In order to un-mute the Uconnect威 Phone:
audio system. The Uconnect威 Phone will work the same
• Press the
button.
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect威 Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect威 Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect威 Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect威 Phone paired mobile phone to the
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
button and
Uconnect威 Phone or vice versa, press the
When you mute the Uconnect威 Phone, you will still be
say “Transfer Call”.
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect威 Phone:
• Press the
button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
being announced, press the
button and say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sections for an
alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect威 Phone And Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
Select Another Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威 This feature allows you to select and start using another
connection between your mobile phone and the phone paired with the Uconnect威 Phone.
Uconnect威 Phone System, follow the instructions debutton to begin.
• Press the
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
• Press the
button to begin.
button at any time while the
• You can also press the
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
you wish to select.
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
• When prompted, say “List Phones”.
• The Uconnect威 Phone will play the phone names of all
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect威 Phone will return to using the highest Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect姞
priority phone present in or near (approximately Phone
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Uconnect威 Phone Tutorial
Delete Uconnect威 Phone Paired Mobile Phones
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
• Press the
button to begin.
button and say “Uconnect威 Tutorial.”
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Voice Training
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect威
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
prompts.
training mode, follow one of the two following procebutton at any time while the dures:
• You can also press the
list is being played, and then choose the phone you
From outside the Uconnect威 Phone mode (e.g., from
wish to delete.
radio mode):
• Press and hold the
the session begins, or,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
button for five seconds until
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
• Press the
button and say the “Voice Training”, This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
“System Training”, or “Start Voice Training” com- and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
mand.
You can either press the Uconnect威 Phone button to Voice Command
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect威 Phone. For
provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
best results, the Voice Training session should be comconsole (if equipped) and the mirror.
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
switched off.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
you.
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
Reset
• Press the
button.
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect威 Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- • You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
• When navigating through an automated system such
number combinations may not be supported.
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
Far End Audio Performance
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
• Audio quality is maximized under:
in the Uconnect威 Phonebook.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
SMS
Uconnect威 Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Read Messages:
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness If you receive a new text message while your phone is
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and connected to Uconnect威 Phone, an announcement will be
not the Uconnect威 Phone.
made to notify you that you have a new text message. If
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced you wish to hear the new message:
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
button.
• Press the
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
compromised with the convertible top down.
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
Recent Calls
• Uconnect威 Phone will play the new text message for
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Downyou.
load”, Uconnect威 Phone can list your Outgoing, IncomAfter reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
ing and Missed Calls.
the message using Uconnect威 Phone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Send Messages:
3. Where are you?
You can send messages using Uconnect威 Phone. To send 4.
a new message:
5.
button.
• Press the
6.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
7.
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
8.
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
9.
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
I need more direction.
LOL
Why
I love you
Call me
button while the 10.
To send a message, press the
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
11.
Uconnect威 Phone will prompt you to say the name or
12.
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
13.
List of Preset Messages:
14.
1. Yes
15.
2. No
Call me later
Thanks
See You in 15 minutes
I am on my way
I’ll be late
Are you there yet?
Where are we meeting?
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
16. Can this wait?
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
17. Bye for now
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect威 Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
18. When can we meet?
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
Power-Up
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
After switching the ignition from OFF to either the ON or
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait
the system from announcing the new incoming mes- at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system.
sages.
• Press the
button.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
help
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
pairing
phonebook
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect威 Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
General Information
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System Operation
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
The Uconnect威 Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
USB mass storage class device, iPOD family of
the party responsible for compliance could void the
devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device,
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface Sys• This device must accept any interference received,
tem as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
including interference that may cause undesired opVoice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
eration.
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
voice level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws. All attention should be focused on safely
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
button, you These commands are universal and can be used from any
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
command.
the active application.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
seconds, the system will present you with a list of a normal speaking volume.
options.
The system will best recognize your speech if the winIf you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
button, listen for set to low.
options, press the Voice Command
the beep, and say your command.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com- Main Menu
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
mand
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the
Commands
main menu.
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all In this mode, you can say the following commands:
times. Local commands are available if the supported
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
radio mode is active.
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
Changing the Volume
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth威
Streaming mode)
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com- • “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio AM
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
mands:
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
spoken number)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
Radio FM
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Disc Mode
Bluetooth威 Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you To switch to Bluetooth威 Streaming (BT) mode, say
may say the following commands:
“Bluetooth Streaming”. In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “List” (to list a Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Memo Mode
USB Mode
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
To switch to USB mode, say “USB”. In this mode, you
this mode, you may say the following commands:
may say the following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
one of the following commands:
• “Play” (to play a Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
– “Save” (to save the memo)
Name, Track Name, etc.)
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• “Change to setup”
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) —
During the playback you may press the Voice Combutton to stop playing memos. You promand
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Main menu setup” or
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “Tutorial”
Setup
• “Voice Training”
• “Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Language English”
• “Language French”
• “Language Spanish”
To switch to system setup, you may say one of the NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
button first and wait for the beep before
Command
following:
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
• “Change to setup”
• “Switch to system setup”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Voice Training
SEATS
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect威 vehicle.
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect威 Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switches control the movement of the seat cushion and
the seatback.
Driver Power Seat Switch
1 — Seat Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2 — Seatback Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
WARNING!
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
Power Lumbar Switch
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
Heated
Seats
—
If Equipped
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support.
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Front Heated Seats
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located on the switch bank
below the climate controls.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW,
indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
3
Second Row Heated Seat Switch
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the second row seats are equipped with
heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the
second row passengers to operate the seats independently. The heated seat switches are located on the sliding
side door handle trim panels.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
that time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW,
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster
within two to five minutes.
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Seat Adjuster
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
For models equipped with manual reclining seats, the back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat. forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Head Restraints
Manual Recline Lever
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant ReActive Head Restraints — Front Seats
straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your VeActive Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo- hicle” for further information
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
3
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats
Push Button
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
downward on the head restraint.
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
NOTE: Seat will not stow in the storage bin unless the
armrests are raised.
Head Restraints — Third Row
The head restraint in the center position can be raised and
lowered for tether routing. Refer to “Occupant Re- 4. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the
straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve“LOCK” position and then pull up on the storage bin
hicle” for further information.
latch to open the cover.
Stow ’n Go姞 Seating — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go威 seating, the
second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for
convenient storage.
Second Row Stow ’n Go威
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go威 seats, the seats
will fold and tumble in one motion.
1. Move the front seat fully forward.
2. Recline the front seatback fully forward.
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
3. Raise the armrests on the second row seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever located on The non-adjustable head restraint and seatback will fold
the outboard side of the seat.
automatically during the seat tumble. No additional
actuation is necessary.
Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head
Restraint Fold Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Non-Adjustable Head Restraint
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
3
Tumbled Second Row Seat
Automatic Folding Seatback
The seat will automatically tumble into position for easy
storage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Push the seat into the storage bin.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
WARNING!
Seat In Storage Bin
7. Close the storage bin cover.
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
1. Return the seatback to the upright position.
To Unstow Second Row Seats
1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover.
2. Pull up on the strap to lift the seat out of the storage
bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat
anchors.
3
3. Lift the seatback to the full upright position.
4. Return the head restraint to its upright position, close
the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking
mechanism to the “Unlocked” position.
Stow ’n Go威 Seat — Folded And Latched Position
To tumble or stow the seat from the folded and latched
position: return the seatback and head restraint to the
upright position. Then pull up on the seatback recliner
lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest
and seatback and tumble seat forward.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Raising The Seatback
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Return the head restraint to the upright position.
Easy Entry Second Row
The second row Stow ’n Go威 seats allow easy entry to the
third row seat or rear cargo area.
Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard
side of the seat.
Raising The Head Restraint
3. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard
side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and
tumble seat forward.
Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head
Restraint Fold Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
The seat will automatically fold into position for easy
entry into the third row.
WARNING!
In the event of a collision you could be injured if the
seat is not fully latched.
3
Quad Seats — If Equipped
Both Quad seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjuster
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Recline
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Fold-Flat
Easy Entry
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward The Quad seats can be tilted forward for easy entry into
position and push the seatback forward until it rests on the third row. With the Quad seat in the fold-flat position,
the seat cushion.
lift up on the easy entry lever located near the bottom of
the seat and lift the seat forward.
Fold-Flat Quad Seat
Easy Entry Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull
strap located on the outboard side of the seat near the
bottom of the seat back. Third row passengers can pull on
the strap and push the Quad seat forward for folding the
seatback and accessing the easy entry lever.
Removal
The Quad seats can be removed if additional storage is
needed. With the seat in the easy entry position, lift the
cross beam forward and up to release the front anchor
latches.
Pull Strap for Third Row Passengers
Cross Beam For Seat Removal
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Release levers are located on the rear leg assemblies, near
While the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it is the floor. To remove the seat, squeeze each release handle
and rotate downwards to deploy the wheels. A lock
removable for added cargo space.
indicator button pops up when the seat is unlocked. The
seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle and
moved on its Easy Out威 Rollers.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
Second Row Bench Seat
Release Handles
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent positions on the floor. Squeeze the release handle and rotate
upward until the lock indicator button returns into the
handle.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the bench seats could become
loose. Personal injuries could result. After reinstalling these seats, be sure the red indicator button on
the release handles return into the handles.
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
Third Row Power Seat Switch
The power recline feature, located on the side of the seat Third Row Power Folding Seat — If Equipped
cushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
for occupant comfort.
left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
NOTE: Lower the head restraint by pulling on the
release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side of
the head restraint.
3
One Touch Folding Seat Third Row
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open
and the vehicle is in PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Left and right third row seats can be folded individually NOTE:
or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to
• Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small
the following positions using the switch bank located on
buckle and lower the head restraints before attempting
the left rear trim panel:
to fold/stow the power third row seats.
• To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, press a
different seat position selector switch to stop the seat.
Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position
can be selected.
• The third row power seat system includes obstacle
detection for safe operation. When the system detects
an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse the
motion a short distance to move the seat away from
the obstacle. Should this occur, remove the obstacle
and press the button again, for the desired position.
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
1 — Open to Normal
3 — Tailgate/Fold Flat
2 — Stow
4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback
by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the
head restraint down.
2. Lower the outboard head restraints by pulling on the
release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side
of the head restraint.
3
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull release strap marked “2” located on the rear of the 4. Pull release strap marked “3” to release the anchors.
seat to lower the seatback.
Release Strap “3”
Release Strap “2”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
5. Pull release strap marked “4” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
3
Stowed Third Row Seat
To Unfold Third Row Seats
Release Strap “4”
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the
anchors latch.
2. Pull release strap marked “2” to unlock the recliner.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pulling strap “4” releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.
To avoid serious injury or death, never operate the
vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in
the tailgate mode.
4. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Tailgate Mode
WARNING!
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and
some front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of
the bagged goods.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
1. Pull release strap “3”, then pull release strap “4” to
rotate the entire seat rearward.
The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel
can be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, outside
2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the
mirrors, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals, and
seatback and push forward until the anchors latch.
radio station preset settings. Your Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitters can also be programmed to recall the
same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory
NOTE: Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered
button (1 or 2) is pressed, you erase the memory settings
for that button and store a new one.
1. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2.
The system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the
Driver Memory Switch
system to complete the memory recall before continuYour vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE
ing to Step 3.
transmitters. Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to
each of the memory positions.
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s sideview mirror to the desired positions.
4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired
positions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up 11. Select “Remote Linked to Memory” in the Electronic
to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set).
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter “Yes”.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Unremove the key.
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in7. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the
formation.
driver’s door.
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next Memory
8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
position using the other numbered Memory button
or to link another RKE transmitter to memory.
button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must
be performed within 5 seconds if you desire to also use
Memory Position Recall
a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
transmitters.
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC.
10. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
the ON position.
MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position
1.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press 3. Press and release the memory SET (S) button located
on the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling that
MEMORY button 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
you are in the memory set mode.
button on the RKE transmitter linked to Memory Position
2.
4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
button 1 on the driver’s door. A chime will sound
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
signaling to you that the driver memory has been set.
MEMORY buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S,
1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
driver’s mirror, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of
button on the RKE transmitter. A chime will sound
one second will occur before another recall can be
signaling to you that the RKE transmitter link has been
selected.
successfully disabled.
To Disable RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory
To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and Memory Position, repeat Steps 1 to 5 for each RKE
transmitter.
remove the key.
2. Press and release MEMORY button 1. The system will
recall any memory settings stored in position 1. Wait
for the system to complete the memory recall before
continuing to Step 3.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features⬙ in “Understanding
•
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat
ONLY)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
will return to its previously set position when you
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of
the LOCK position.
When you remove the key from the ignition switch the
driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is
between 0.9 – 2.7 in (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
key from the ignition switch.
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
or Easy Entry.
the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit Position.
to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
or disabled through the programmable features in the To open the hood, two latches must be released.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If your
vehicle is not equipped with an EVIC, your dealership 1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument
panel, below the steering column.
can activate/deactivate this feature for you. For details,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Hood Release Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
center of the hood opening. Locate, then push the position.
safety catch lever downward while raising the hood at
the same time.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 12 in (30 cm) and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Safety Lever Location
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the headlight, parking light and instrument panel operation.
instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
interior lights and the fog lights.
based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn
the headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise
position aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the
headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight
Time Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off,
turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O (OFF)
position.
LIGHTS
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the Automatic mode.
Headlight Switch With Halo Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds or not
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the
remain on. To change the timer setting, see your authoengine is running, the headlights will automatically turn
rized dealer.
on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights
on when windshield wipers are on may be found on The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system. equipped with an EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped
Headlight Delay — If Equipped
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this
feature.
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay interval begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the
headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the
ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Lights-On Reminder
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on, or if the
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the
lights or the low beam headlights and push in the
ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
headlight switch control knob. Pressing the headlight
the driver’s door is opened.
switch control knob in a second time will turn the front
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
fog lights off.
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
except PARK. This provides a constant lights on condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate
at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brake
is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn
off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the
same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of
the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lighting On
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer switch is located next to the headlight Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
switch.
second detent (extreme top position) to turn on the
interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the
dimmer control is in this position.
Interior lights are also turned on when a door or liftgate
is opened, the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
activated, or when the dimmer control is moved to the
extreme top.
The interior lights will automatically turn off in approximately 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds
every activation thereafter until the engine is started, if
one of the following occur:
Dimmer Control
• A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the • Any overhead reading light is left on
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
NOTE: The key must be out of the ignition switch or the The Halo control switch is located to the right of the
ignition switch must be in the OFF position for this dimmer switch.
feature to operate.
Interior Lighting Off
Rotate the left dimmer control to the off position (extreme
bottom). The interior lights will remain off when the
doors or liftgate are open.
3
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the first detent. This
feature brightens the odometer, radio and overhead
displays when the parking lights or headlights are on.
Halo Lights — If Equipped
Halo lights are strategically placed soft lighting that help
to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in
locating specific features while driving at night.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Halo Control
To activate the Halo lights, rotate the Halo
switch control upward or downward to increase or decrease the lighting.
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the:
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the • Turn Signals
steering column.
• Headlight Beams Low/High
• Flash-To-Pass (Optical Horn)
• Front and Rear Wipers — Washer Functions
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Multifunction Lever
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Turn Signal Warning
Flash-To-Pass
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mile
(1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound to
alert the driver.
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the lever is released.
Lane Change Assist
SmartBeam™ — If Equipped
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash lighting at night by automating high beam control
three times then automatically turn off.
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle speHigh/Low Beam Switch
cific light and automatically switches from high beams to
When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multi- low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
function lever toward the instrument panel will switch
from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the NOTE: Broken, muddy or obstructed headlights and
neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
operation.
Also, dirt, film and other obstructions on the windshield
or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate
To Deactivate
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center SmartBeam™ system.
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Un1. Select “Automatic High Beams — OFF” through the
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforEVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
mation.
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor2. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
mation.
AUTO (A) position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch 2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights from the high beam to the low beam
the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to
position.
“Multifunction Lever” in this section for further information.
3. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO
(A) to the on position.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at, or above, 25 mph (40 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
Battery Protection
This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing
down the battery if the headlights, parking lights, or
front fog lights are left on for extended periods of time
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. After
eight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK
position and the headlight switch in any position other
than OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically
until the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight
switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition switch is turned to any other position other than
Washer And Wiper Controls
LOCK during the eight minute delay.
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage
the multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the multifunc- to the wiper motor may occur.
tion lever to select the desired wiper speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Intermittent Wiper System
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.
Windshield Washers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between
To use the Washer, push on the end of the lever to the
second detent and hold while spray is desired. If the lever
is pushed while on the intermittent setting, the wipers
will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is pushed while the
wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate
several wipe cycles, then turn off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Mist Feature
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
Press the end of the multifunction lever inward (toward This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
the steering column) to the first detent and release for a automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
single wiping cycle.
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
the end of the multifunction lever to one of the five
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
feature.
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
Rear Wiper And Washer
multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been
Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates the calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the operarear intermittent wipers. To activate the washers, rotate tor desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select
the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spray sensitivity positions 4 or 5. If the operator desires less
until the ring is released, and then resume the intermit- wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2
tent interval.
or 1. Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position
when not using the system.
NOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittent
wiper speed only.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
following conditions:
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the
switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the
windshield.
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, or
the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph
may reduce rain sensor performance.
(0 km/h), or the outside temperature rises above
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
freezing.
through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings • Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is ON, and the transmis(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
sion shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, and the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or
the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
NOTE:
•
•
•
•
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
To
unlock
the
steering
column, push the lever downward
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
(toward
the
floor).
To
tilt the steering column, move the
steering column.
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
steering column in position, push the lever upward until shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
fully engaged.
warm.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch
bank below the climate controls.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
Press the switch to turn on the heated
steering wheel. The light on the switch
will illuminate to indicate the steering
wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
a second time will turn off the heated
steering wheel and light indicator.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
steering wheel to operate.
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
Vehicle” for further information.
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
WARNING!
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, from the driver to provide improved position with the
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- steering wheel.
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The switch is located on the left side of the steering • The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
column.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed on
vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be
adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Adjustable Pedal Switch
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
3
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over 1 — ON/OFF
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 4 — CANCEL
(40 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Accelerate For Passing
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inPress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
speed will be established.
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph vehicle set speed.
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on EQUIPPED
moderate hills is normal.
The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system provides visual
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so and audible indications of the distance between the rear
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense威 System
Control.
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ParkSense威 will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense威 can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense威 is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
The ParkSense威 Warning Display is located in the Instrument cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
The four ParkSense威 sensors, located in the rear fascia/
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense姞 Sensors
ParkSense姞 Warning Display
The ParkSense威 Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
ParkSense威 Warning Display
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense姞 Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
Park Assist System OFF
Park Assist System ON
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
3
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arcs
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Radio Mute
No
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Yes
Yes
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
2 Slow
Flashing
Yes
1 Slow
Flashing
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense威 will MUTE the radio, if on, when the (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
system is sounding an audio tone.
further information.
Enabling/Disabling ParkSense姞
When ParkSense威 is disabled, the instrument cluster will
ParkSense威 can be enabled and disabled through the
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
Customer-Programmable Features section of the EVIC.
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound and
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS- the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
TEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message
REVERSE.
continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
Service The ParkSense姞 Rear Park Assist System
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
When the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System is malEVIC, see an authorized dealer.
functioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the Cleaning The ParkSense姞 System
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash soap
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damYour Instrument Panel” for further information. When age the sensors.
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the NOTE:
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
will not operate.
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威 system operatIf “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears in the
ing properly.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense威.
properly. The ParkSense威 system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
fascia/bumper.
• When you turn ParkSense威 off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off • Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
key.
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the EVIC will
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
the EVIC .
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense威
• ParkSense威, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
sounding a tone.
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
• Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care not
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威 in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense威.
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using the Rear Park Assist system, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView威 camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License
plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/ distances for each zone:
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威 should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView威 camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView威 to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
OVERHEAD CONSOLES
Front Overhead Console
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
Two versions of the overhead console are available. The
base front overhead console model featured fixed incandescent courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass stor3. Press the “camera setup” soft-key.
age and conversation mirror. The premium front over4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting head console model features a LED focused light that
illuminates the instrument panel cupholders, two swivthe “enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
eling LED lights, flip-down sunglass storage, conversa5. Press the “save” soft-key.
tion mirror, optional power sliding door switches and an
optional power liftgate switch.
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
NOTE: Premium sunroof console models include all of
above except sunglass storage.
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Courtesy/Interior Lighting
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights
(standard dome light has two buttons). The lights turn on
when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened.
If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
Overhead Console
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press a second time to turn each light off. You
may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the
outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows (LED lamps only).
The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also
illuminated from a light in the overhead console (premium console only). This light is turned on when the
headlight switch is on, and will adjust in brightness when
the dimmer control is rotated up or down.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only)
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses.
From the closed position, press the door latch to open the
compartment.
Full Open Position
From this position, the door can be fully closed or, by
rotating upward about 3/4 of the way and releasing,
positioned for conversation mirror use.
Over Door Latch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights. The
lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the
liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on
when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
Conversation Mirror Position
NOTE: From the “conversation mirror” position, the
door can only be closed.
To return to the full open position, the door must first be
closed and then opened by pressing the latch again to
release.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press the lens a second time to turn each light off.
You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing
the outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows.
Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped
The rear overhead storage system is available in two
versions: with or without sunroof.
An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines
down on the front foot-well area while in courtesy mode,
for added convenience.
Reading Lights
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
Rear Console Halo Lighting
The rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting
around the perimeter of the console base. This feature
provides additional lighting options while traveling and
is controlled by the headlight switch. Refer to “Lights/
Halo Lights — If Equipped” in “Understanding the
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
Overhead Compartment Features
1 — DVD*
2 — Rear HVAC
3 — Interior Lights
4 — Storage
* If equipped, otherwise
storage.
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Storage
DVD*
Interior Lights
Halo Lighting
HomeLink威 replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink威 unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink威 buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink威 channels. The HomeLink威 indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Overhead Consoles
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
NOTE:
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink姞
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink威 for the first time. Do not
erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink威
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink威
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in
view.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink威 NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
button you want to program and the hand-held trans- step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
mitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink威 indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink威 has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. ReNOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes
vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to proTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
gram while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in
follow these steps:
view.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
button you want to program and the hand-held transthe indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
mitter button.
not release the button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programcator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
and then rapidly after HomeLink威 has received the
steps.
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
from slow to rapid.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
before 1995.
and observe the indicator light.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transfollow these steps:
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do time-out in the same manner.
not release the button.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining door or gate motor.
steps.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in
view.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi- programming, plug it back in at this time.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
fully trained.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
4. Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash
follow these steps:
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
door may open and close while you are programming.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
not release the button.
and observe the indicator light.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
3. Without releasing the button proceed with The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Troubleshooting Tips
Using HomeLink姞
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
To operate, press and release the programmed are some of the most common solutions:
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitprogrammed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operater.
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
also be used at any time.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
Security
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
in your vehicle.
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the
Accessory or Run position, for vehicles equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go™). Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
the sunroof.
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
Opening Sunroof — Express
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially Pinch Protect Feature
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obClosing Sunroof — Express
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucsecond and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Wind Buffeting
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Venting Sunroof — Express
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurand the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
Sunshade Operation
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Sunroof Maintenance
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is the glass panel.
open.
Ignition Off Operation
For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
switch and the passenger-side power outlet is connected
directly to the battery. The driver-side power outlet will
also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped
with an optional Smoker’s Package).
For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets are located on the
lower instrument panel, below the open storage bin. The
driver-side power outlet is controlled by the ignition
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Instrument Panel Outlets
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 cigar One outlet in the removable floor console (if equipped)
knob and element must be used.
shares a fuse with the lower outlet in the instrument
panel and is also connected to the battery. Do not exceed
a maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) shared
CAUTION!
between the lower panel outlet and the removable floor
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 console outlet.
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Removable Console Outlet
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On vehicles equipped with the Super Console the power
outlets are located under the retractable cover. To access
the power outlets push down on the cover and slide it
toward the instrument panel.
The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate and
the upper outlet in the instrument panel are both controlled by the ignition switch. Each of these outlets can
support 160 Watts (13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts
(13 Amps) for each of these outlets.
The power outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a
key or battery symbol indicating the power source. The
power outlet, located on the lower instrument panel, is
powered directly from the battery. Items plugged into
this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
Super Console Outlets
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuses
1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat (Opt) or with
Console Rear
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or with
Console Front
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel or
with Console Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 110 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet (if equipped) converts
DC current to AC current, and is located on the left rear
trim panel immediately behind the second row left
passenger seat.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
Power Inverter Outlet
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
The power inverter switch is located on the instrument
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
panel below the climate controls.
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
To turn on the power outlet, press the switch once. Press
the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
There are cupholders located throughout the interior. All
liners are removable for cleaning. Pull the flexible liner
from the cupholder drawer or tray starting at one edge
for easy removal. Refer to “Cleaning The Instrument
Panel Cupholders” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Instrument Panel Cupholders
The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull-out
drawer just above the lower storage bin.
Front Cupholders
Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place the
container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells.
The cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide
variety of container types and sizes. Press down on the
container to engage the cupholder retention features.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
For rear passengers two cupholders are located in the
On models equipped with the Super Console, there are pull-out drawer, located in the back of the Super Console.
Pull the drawer out to the first position to use the
two cupholders located in the center of the console.
cupholders.
Super Console — If Equipped
3
Super Console Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Premium Console Cupholders — If Equipped
Interior Bottle Holders
On models equipped with premium center consoles, There are four bottle holders located in the interior. One
there are four cupholders located on the top of the bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim
console.
panels, and one bottle holder is molded into each side
sliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommodates up to a 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottle.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Premium Console Cupholders
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped
With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’s
Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one
of the two cupholders in the center front instrument
panel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the
thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Press the ash
receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull
upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning
and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accommodate a second ash receiver, if desired.
Interior Bottle Holder
Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating. STORAGE
The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes, Glove Compartments
toys, games or MP3 players, etc.
Upper and lower glove compartments are located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Upper Glove Compartment
Lower Glove Compartment
To open the upper compartment, press in on the button, To open the lower compartment pull out on the release
located on the left side of the upper door. The door will handle.
automatically open.
Lower Compartment
Upper Compartment
To close the compartment door, push downward on the
door’s surface to latch the door closed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
Door Trim Panel Storage
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
3
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Driver’s Seatback Storage
Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped
1 — Bag Holder
The driver’s seatback has a primary storage pocket on all 2 — Standard Pocket
models and an optional secondary mesh pocket.
3 — Mesh Pocket
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Umbrella Holder
Second Row Floor Storage Bins
An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into The area below the floor covers, located in front of the
the left front door entry scuff molding.
second row seats, is available for storage.
Umbrella Holder
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide
the storage bin locking mechanism to the ⬙unlocked⬙
position to allow greater access to the storage bin.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Storage Bin Safety Warning
WARNING! (Continued)
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
• Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
• Do not allow children to have access to the second
row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin,
young children may not be able to escape. If
trapped in the storage bin, children can die from
suffocation or heat stroke.
• In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover has an the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
Emergency Release Lever built into the latching mecha- inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark
lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
nism.
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
3
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Center And Rear Overhead Console Storage — If
Equipped
The overhead storage system comes in several options.
Overhead Console Features
1 — DVD*
2 — Rear HVAC
3 — Courtesy Lights
4 — Storage
* If equipped, otherwise storage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Storage
DVD*
Courtesy Lights
Halo Lighting
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
Coat Hooks
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit
is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit
can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.
3
Cargo Area Storage
The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement
“Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearward
cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate
closing.
Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit
NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 foot
sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor
with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved
slightly forward of the rearmost position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage
cups or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. Cupholders are
There are three consoles available: Basic, Premium and
dishwasher safe for cleaning.
Super.
• The cupholders are removable to access a large storage
WARNING!
bin.
CONSOLE FEATURES
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
• The basic console is removable from the vehicle for
additional floor space by removing the cap and clip at
the console base.
To Remove The Basic Floor Console
1. Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip.
2. Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to
clear the rear load floor hook.
Basic Console
Basic Console features consist of the following:
• The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to
easily pass through the first row to the second.
3. Remove the console.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
To Reinstall The Basic Floor Console
WARNING!
1. Position the console at a slight angle (front slightly
higher than the rear).
2. Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/
hook.
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
3. Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole Premium Console — If Equipped
is centered on the winch hole.
The three-compartment console with sliding storage bin,
4. Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down- sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage
ward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall the bin offers multiple configurations.
cover plug.
• Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for clean5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
ing. The cupholders can accept plastic bottles, large
cups or mugs with handles.
• Top tray storage
• Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDs
or other items
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Large console center storage will store headphones for Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholders
the available rear DVD entertainment system or other and a convenient storage tray.
items
• 12 Volt DC power outlet provides continuous power
inside the console for cell phones or other electronics.
• Rear occupant accessible
• Multiple adjustments
• Removable from vehicle for additional floor space.
The top and center console sections slide forward and
rearward to provide added user comfort. A one-piece cup
holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for
cleaning. The cupholders will also accommodate large
size cups and 20 oz (.6 L) bottles.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Console Position 1
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large Dual Storage Bins
storage area below.
Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a
rearward position. This is accomplished by lifting the
upper most latch at the front of the console. This provides
easy access to the storage area below and provides two of
the four cupholders for the second row passengers.
Console Position 2
Console Position 3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost To Remove The Premium Floor Console
position. Again, lifting second latch handle at the front of
1. Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the
the console, allows complete access to a lower storage bin
console.
and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers.
2. Lift the rear of the console up several inches/
centimeters.
3. Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove
console.
To Reinstall The Premium Floor Console:
1. Position the console at a slight angle (rear slightly
higher than the front).
2. Slide the console forward into the floor bracket.
Console Position 4
3. Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting
on the floor bracket.
4. Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated
in the rear floor bracket.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
3
Super Console — If Equipped
The Super Console contains multiple storage areas, front
lower pass through, top forward bin, top rearward bin
and rear pull out drawer.
The super console contains a pass through storage area
accessible for both the driver and front passenger.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Front Lower Pass Through
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The super console tambour doors are opened by pushing
down on the finger tabs and sliding the door. The front
tambour door slides forward, the rear tambour door
slides rearward.
NOTE: The front cupholder light ring and pass through
lighting is controlled by a dimming switch located on the
instrument panel, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Located in the back of the super console is a storage
drawer and cupholders for the rear passengers.
Super Console
1 — Front Sliding Tambour Door
2 — Cupholder Light Ring
3 — Rear Sliding Tambour Door
Rear Drawer Storage
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the right side
of the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel
when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED
light bulbs and is powered by a lithium battery that
recharges when snapped back into place and the vehicle
is either running or the key is in the accessory position.
3
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
Press And Release
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high, REAR WINDOW FEATURES
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE:
Three-Press Switch
• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second
time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear win- LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
dow defroster only when the engine is operating.
The automatic load leveling system will provide a levelriding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
CAUTION!
conditions.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
the heating elements:
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
window.
within the roof rack side rails. If adding cargo, deploy the
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
crossbars. Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
crossbars, to maximum of 150 lbs (68 kg). The roof rack
does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
plus that on the external rack does not exceed the distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
maximum vehicle load capacity.
NOTE:
• Crossbars are error-proofed and cannot be deployed or
stowed in the incorrect positions.
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
Deploying the Crossbars
To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar
from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
Crossbar Stowed In Side Rail
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to
keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw
down.
3
Loosening Crossbars
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Stowed Position
300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Deployed Position
Deploy Positions – Choose Two Of Three
Then, position the crossbars across the roof.
Make sure the directional arrows on the crossbars align
with the directional arrows on the side rails. Set the
NOTE: The crossbars are identical and can be placed in
crossbars into the deployed positions.
any two of the three deploy positions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301
3
Crossbar To Side Rail Installation
Tightening Crossbar
Once the crossbars are set into position, tighten the Stowing the Crossbars
thumb screws completely.
Reverse the procedure to stow the crossbars, again,
taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Crossbars
are identical and can be stowed in either rail nest. Once
the crossbars are stowed, tighten the thumb screws
completely.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with rail tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops.
CAUTION!
• Check deployed crossbars frequently and retighten
thumb screws as necessary.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed.
• The load should be secured and placed on top of
the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is
necessary to place the load on the roof, place a
blanket or other protective layer between the load
and the roof surface.
Rail Tie Loops
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
Sun screens are available for second and third row
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels,
and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks
that the sun screens attach to when pulled out.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Sun Screen Retracted
3
304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen. To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
top of the window.
base sill.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
Sun Screen Extended
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .310
▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE . . . . . . . . . .311
▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . . .312
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .313
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
▫ Trip A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
▫ Trip B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ To Reset A Trip Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Tire PSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ RKE Linked To Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . .340
▫ Remote Start Comfort Sys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
▫ Horn With Remote Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
▫ Horn with Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Nav–Turn By Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
▫ Enable/Disable the Rear Park Assist System. . .345
▫ Auto Unlock Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
▫ Remote Unlock Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ Flash Lamps with Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Automatic High Beams — If Equipped . . . . . .347
▫ Headlamp Off Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Headlamps with Wipers
(Available with Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . .348
▫ Intermittent Wiper Options — If Equipped. . . .348
▫ Key-Off Power Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Illuminated Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped . . . . . . .349
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
▫ Flashers with Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 䡵 UCONNECT威 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) . . . . . . .349
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .352
▫ Easy Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ Tilt Mirror In Reverse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Blind Spot Alert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Calibrate Compass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Turn Menu Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
䡵 Uconnect威 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/
HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Operating Instructions
(Voice Command System) — If Equipped. . . . .351
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect威 Phone) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Notes on Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . .360
䡵 UCONNECT威 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . .360
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .360
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . . .371
▫ INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . .371
▫ Uconnect威 (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped. . . .372
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect威 Phone) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
▫ Blu-Ray Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While
A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . .389
▫ Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio . . .391
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ Play A DVD Using The VES™ Player
(If Equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is
Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . .383
䡵 UCONNECT威 MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — If
Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Third Row Swivel Screen (If Equipped) . . . . . .399
▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ VES Remote Control – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .400
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .404
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .406
▫ Unwired威 Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .424
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
▫ Rear Manual Climate Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Winter Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Vacation/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .424
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
— Air Vents
— Instrument Cluster
— Shift Lever
— Radio
5
6
7
8
— Analog Clock
— Upper Glove Compartment
— Lower Glove Compartment
— Climate Controls
9 — DVD – If Equipped
10 — Storage Bin
11 — Cup Holders
12 — Switch Bank
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
13
14
15
16
—
—
—
—
Ignition Switch
Hood Release
Dimmer Switch
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
If the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on, a continuous chime will sound to
1. Tachometer
alert you to turn the signal off. If either indicator flashes
This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,
5. High Beam Indicator
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
This indicator shows that the high beam head2. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forThis indicator will illuminate when the front fog ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
lights are on.
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
3. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
6. Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle Information
This indicator will illuminate when the park Center (EVIC) Display — If Equipped
lights or headlights are turned on.
Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been
4. Turn Signal Indicators
driven.
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
when the turn signal lever is operated.
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
Message Display Area
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate Ajar
LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure
This also displays Trip A and Trip B, DTE, MPG or gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
L/100km, OAT (Outside Air Temperature) information to
Base Cluster, use STEP and RESET button (on steering noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
wheel) to access or reset the display.
CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
LoCOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Coolant
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed in noFUSE
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display Area If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
located in the instrument cluster.
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odometer display area. For further information on fuses and
Display — If Equipped” for further information.
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
LoW tirE
Vehicle”.
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
CHAngE OIL
display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three
cycles.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The CHAngE OIL message will flash in
gASCAP
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel seconds, after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display indicator system is duty cycle-based, which means the
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
STEP button on the steering wheel to turn off the your personal driving style.
message. If the problem continues, the message will
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
release the STEP button on the steering wheel. To reset “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
the oil change indicator system (after performing the 7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
scheduled maintenance), perform the following steps.
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
not start the engine).
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
within 10 seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
— If Equipped
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the 9. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
monitors engine and automatic transmission conreplacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
to continue to function properly.
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
CAUTION!
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
warning have been established for the tire size poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
tion or sensor damage may result when using re- stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
placement equipment that is not of the same size, most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause not require towing.
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
10. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC 13. Fuel Door Reminder
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
vehicle.
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that
14. Fuel Gauge
caused the ESC activation.
11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
12. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
15. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
16. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
NOTE:
You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK.
18. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
The highest available transmission gear is displayed in
including brake fluid level and parking brake
the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Informaapplication. If the brake light turns on it may
tion Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic Range Select
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
(ERS) feature is active. Use the +/- selector on the shift the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
lever to activate ERS. Refer to “Automatic Transmission” the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesdetected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
sary.
inspected by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is 20. Temperature Gauge
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posiThe temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperation.
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
CAUTION!
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver or front passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving,
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
19. Seat Belt Reminder Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
21. Low Fuel Light
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
23. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
fuel is added.
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
22. Charging System Light
chime will sound when this light turns on.
This light shows the status of the electrical charg- Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
ing system. The light should come on when the This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
24. Engine Temperature Warning Light
25. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condiThis light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
tion. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
light will come on when the ignition is first
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the engine is have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
allowed to cool.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off.
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authoservice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required and you may experience reduced performance,
an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
26. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
CAUTION!
During sustained high speed driving or trailer
towing up long grades on hot days, the automatic transmission oil may become too hot.
When the transmission overheat warning light
turns on, you will experience reduced vehicle performance until the automatic transmission cools down.
Once the transmission has cooled down and the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally. If the high
speed is maintained, the overheating will continue to
occur.
If the overheating continues, it may become necessary to
stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL until the light turns off.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the following:
instrument cluster.
• Radio Information
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire PSI
• Vehicle Info
• Messages
• Units
• System Setup (Personal Settings)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Turn Menu Off
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP button to scroll upwheel:
ward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units,
System Setup) and sub-menus.
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and
sub-menus.
SELECT Button
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
The SELECT button allows access to information in EVIC submenus, selects some feature
settings, and resets some EVIC features. The
EVIC prompts the driver when the SELECT
button can be used by displaying the right arrow graphic.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
into several categories:
previous menu or sub-menu.
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
message takes control of the main display area for five
Displays
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
The EVIC display consists of three sections:
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
1. The top line where compass direction and outside reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
temperature are displayed.
as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
EVIC’s
compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
message
type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙
messages are displayed.
and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙.
3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom• Unstored Messages
eter line.
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
The main display area will normally display the main condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙ is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle).
BACK Button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙.
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Examples of this message type are ⬙Memory System Unavailable - Not in Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
• Key in ignition
• Ignition or Accessory On
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
• Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
• Remote start aborted — Fuel low
• Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
• Remote start active — Push Start Button
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the • Remote start active — Key to Run
middle, and red telltales on the left.
• Wrong Key
• Damaged Key
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
• Key not programmed
• Oil Change Required
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Check Gascap
• Key Left Vehicle
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Key Not Detected
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound when vehicle starts •
moving)
•
• Low Tire Pressure
•
• Service TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor•
ing System” in “Starting And Operating”)
•
• Turn Signal On
• RKE Battery Low
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Park Assist Disabled
Service Park Assist System
Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not in Park
Blind Spot System Off — This message is displayed
when the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the Blind
Spot System has been turned off.
• Service Keyless System
• LOW WASHER FLUID
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Blind Spot System Not Available — This message is
displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor blockage, electronic interference, or other ⬙temporary⬙ conditions. When this message is displayed both outside
rear view icons will be illuminated. If electronic interference is present, the BSM system will illuminate the
icon only on the side of interference as long as interference is present.
EVIC White Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Electronic Range Select (ERS) Status
The shift lever status “5,4,3,2,1” are displayed indicating
the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1” indicate the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has been engaged
and the gear selected is displayed. For further informa• Service Blind Spot System — This message is dis- tion on ERS, refer to “Starting And Operating”
played to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) • Electronic Speed Control Ready
system is permanently unavailable. The driver will
This light will turn on when the electronic
receive an EVIC message and the BSM display warnspeed control is ready. For further information,
ing in both mirrors will be permanently illuminated. If
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Underthis message is present see an authorized dealer.
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
• Loose Gascap Indicator
• Electronic Speed Control SET
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the telltale display area. Tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button
EVIC Amber Telltale Lights
to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell- message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
tales. These telltales include:
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
• Low Fuel Light
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal • Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
This light will turn on to indicate the windfuel is added.
shield washer fluid is low.
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Charging System Light
EVIC Red Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
ignition
switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
• Door Ajar
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
This light will turn on to indicate that one or driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
more doors may be ajar.
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authoThis light indicates low engine oil pressure. The rized dealer.
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
on.
This light informs you of a problem with the
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
light will come on when the ignition is first
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the • Engine Temperature Warning Light
light does not come on during starting, have the system
This light warns of an overheated engine condichecked by an authorized dealer.
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge apIf a problem is detected, the light will come on while the proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho- If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the verequired. You may experience reduced performance, an hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
require towing.
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
WARNING!
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
CAUTION!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
Oil Change Required
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds,
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (Do
not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
Fuel Economy
ON/ RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press
within 10 seconds.
the SELECT button. The following Fuel Economy func3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE tions display in the EVIC:
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
• Average Fuel Economy (AVG)
OFF/LOCK position.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
• Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. The
Average Fuel Economy can be reset by following the
prompt in the EVIC to use the SELECT button. When the
fuel economy is reset, the display will read “zero” for two
seconds. Then, the history information will be erased,
and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
Average Fuel Economy Display
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle SELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display the
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT
button a second time will toggle the unit of measure
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
between mph or km/h.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant EVIC.
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
Trip Info
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip
Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Info” is highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT
This display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graph button. Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons to
form while driving. This will monitor the gas mileage in highlight one of the following functions if you want to
real-time as you drive and can be used to modify driving reset it:
habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Trip A
Vehicle Speed
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle reset.
Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
To Reset A Trip Function
button to view a graphic of the vehicle with a tire
pressure value at each corner of the graphic.
Units
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT
button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is
selected (highlighted). Press and hold the SELECT button
to clear the resettable function being displayed.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Tire PSI
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
PSI:” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press the SELECT Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
available information displays, then press SELECT to
display any one of the following choices.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
• Coolant Temp
Messages #
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons.
This feature shows the number of stored warning messages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button
will allow you to see what the stored messages are. Press
and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more
than one message to step through the remaining stored
messages. Pressing the BACK button takes you back to
the Main Menu.
• Oil Temp
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Trailer Brake — If Equipped
Displays trailer brake output power and trailer brake Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped
status indicator.
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
change ignition switch position, current ignition status
• Engine Hours
will be displayed in the lower right corner of the EVIC
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
display to the right of the odometer value.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Starting And Operating” for more information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass / Temperature Display
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an
readings and the outside temperature.
environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to Manual Compass Calibration
be driven several minutes before the updated temperaIf the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the 2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the System Setup
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
then press the SELECT button.
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may 3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
displayed in the EVIC then press and release the
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
SELECT button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
the EVIC.
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
“CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now
function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
Compass Variance Map
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup)
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached, Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
then press the SELECT button.
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance” message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE VEHICLE
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the NOT IN PARK displays when you try to select “System
SELECT button. The last variance zone number dis- Setup” from the main menu.
plays in the EVIC.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙System
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper Setup⬙ is highlighted in the main menu of the EVIC. Then
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
press the SELECT button to enter the System Setup
sub-menu. Press and release the UP or DOWN button to
5. Press and release the RETURN button to exit.
select a feature form the following choices:
Compass Variance
Language
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
When in this display you may select one of six languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the UP or
DOWN button while in this display and scroll through
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Nav–Turn By Turn
Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding
When this feature is selected, the navigation system The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive operating information.
route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destinaAuto Unlock Doors
tion is reached. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the feature showing the system has been activated or the the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
deactivated.
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
Enable/Disable the Rear Park Assist System
feature showing the system has been activated, or the
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind check-mark is removed showing the system has been
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE deactivated.
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
the language choices. Press the SELECT button to select
English, Spanish (Español), French (Français), Italian,
German, Dutch. Then, as you continue, the information
will display in the selected language.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Remote Unlock Sequence
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice, to unlock the passenger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
and radio settings can only return to the memory set
position using the door mounted switch. To make your
selection, press and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Remote Start Comfort Sys.
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.
These features will stay on through the duration of
remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
RKE Linked To Memory
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror, system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
and radio settings will return to the memory set position showing the system has been deactivated.
when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed. If
this feature is not selected then the memory seat, mirror,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Horn With Remote Lock
Flash Lamps with Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
This feature may be selected with or without the Flash
Lamps with Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Horn with Remote Start
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “SmartBeam™” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, Intermittent Wiper Options — If Equipped
then press and release the SELECT button until a checkWhen ON is selected, the system will automatically
mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
has been selected.
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release
Headlamps with Wipers
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
(Available with Auto Headlights Only)
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the check-mark is removed showing the system has been
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi- deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the system
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.
Headlamp Off Delay
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected.
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
Illuminated Approach
Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Flashers with Sliding Door
When this feature is selected the signal lamps activate
when power or manual sliding doors are in operation,
signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting or
entering the vehicle. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry)
that the setting has been selected.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has Tilt Mirror In Reverse
been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in When this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
a reverse gear, the driver’s side mirror will tilt downward
to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and
Easy Exit Seat
avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle.
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been Blind Spot Alert
deactivated.
There are three selections when operating Blind Spot
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Alert (“Blind Spot Alert Lights”, “Blind Spot Alert
Lights/CHM”, “Blind Spot Alert Off”). The Blind Spot
Alert feature can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights”
mode, when this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors. The Blind Spot Alert feature
can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights/CHM”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
mode, in this mode the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Blind
Spot Alert Off” is selected the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is deactivated.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Turn Menu Off
Press and release SELECT to turn the menu off.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature Uconnect姞 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark EQUIPPED
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to your Uconnect威 user’s manual for detailed
operating instructions.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. — If Equipped
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
Operating Instructions (Uconnect姞 Phone) — If
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Equipped
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Uconnect威 Phone” for further details.
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
UCONNECT姞 130
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect威 130
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
position to operate the radio.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
another selection. Holding either button will bypass RW/FF
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
TIME Button
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
AM or FM frequencies.
and radio frequency.
TUNE Control
Clock Setting Procedure
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
SCROLL control knob.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
will begin to blink.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL concontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
trol knob to save time change.
mid-range tones.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the front and rear speakers.
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
AM/FM Button
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
pressing the pushbutton twice.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
stations).
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC Button
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
MP3 Audio Play
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
NOTE:
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect威 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
RW/FF
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
AM/FM Button
Supported Media (Disc Types)
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nordomly selected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenexceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
display.)
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
increase with more files and folders
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
supported by the radios.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
supported.
before writing to the disc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
UCONNECT姞 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Uconnect威 130
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
OFF).
ACC position to operate the radio.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
time to turn off the radio.
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Electronic Volume Control
Voice Command Button Uconnect威 Phone — If
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 Equipped
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
Press this button to operate the Uconnect威 Phone feature
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further
volume, and to the left decreases it.
details.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
set at the same volume level as last played.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
SEEK Buttons
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next screen.
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
Press this button to operate the Uconnect威 Phone feature
will begin to blink.
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect威 Phone” for further
details.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL conIf your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
trol knob to save time change.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
screen.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TIME Button
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
and radio frequency.
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
Clock Setting Procedure
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Phone Button Uconnect威 Phone — If Equipped
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
mid-range tones.
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
RW/FF
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the treble tones.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
AM or FM frequencies.
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise sound level from the right or left side speakers.
INFO Button
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS the front and rear speakers.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
16-Digit Character Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Program Type
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
16-Digit Character Display
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Program Type
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character Display
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
save time change.
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The AM/FM Button
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Memory
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
Buttons 1 - 6
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
button number will display.
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
CAUTION!
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect威 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within RW/FF
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
works in a similar manner.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
AM/FM Button
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
TIME Button
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RanPress this button to change the display from a large CD
dom Play.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 • Maximum number of folder levels: 8
file recording media and formats are limited. When
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
Supported Media (Disc Types)
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
display.)
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
character extension)
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal VBR bit rates.
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
MPEG
Sampling FreDiscs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
Bit Rate (kbps)
Specification
quency (kHz)
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
MPEG-1 Audio
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
longer disc loading times.
Layer 3
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
Supported MP3 File Formats
56, 48, 40, 32
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
MPEG-2 Audio
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
Layer 3
112, 96, 80, 64,
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
56, 48, 40, 32,
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
24, 16, 8
not play the file.
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
supported by the radios.
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
Playback of MP3 Files
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
by the following:
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
before writing to the disc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Uconnect姞 (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil- Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the limited coverage in Alaska.
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
System Activation
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
ESN/SID Access
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect威 (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
Please have the following information available when
mode.
calling:
Satellite Antenna
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
Number (ESN/SID).
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as Operating Instructions - Uconnect威 (Satellite)
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within Mode
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
on or above the antenna.
ACC position to operate the radio.
Reception Quality
SEEK Buttons
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
following reasons:
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
structure or under a physical obstacle.
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
without stopping until you release it.
form of short audio mutes.
SCAN Button
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
cause intermittent reception.
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
cause signal blockage.
button a second time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
INFO Button
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
RW/FF
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
direction of the arrows.
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel. exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to button number will display.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. Buttons 1 - 6
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but- Operating Instructions (Uconnect姞 Phone) — If
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be Equipped
stored into pushbutton memory.
Refer to “Uconnect威 Phone” for further details.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
NOTE:
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/ • If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect威. For sales code
Uconnect威 Multimedia radio User’s Manual for iPod威
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio
or external USB device support capability.
iPod威/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate
• Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
iPod威/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as
plays media, but does not use the iPod威 /MP3 control
an option with these radios.
feature to control the connected device.
This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compartment.
iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The glove compartment will have a position
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external where the iPod威 or consumer electronic audio device
USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is cable can be routed through without damaging the cable
when closing the lid. This allows routing of the cable
located in the glove compartment.
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
not available in the glove compartment, route the cable
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the
lid to close without damaging the cable.
Connecting The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches, as described below.
USB Connector Port
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Using This Feature
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to
USB port:
Play Mode
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, iPod威 or external USB device automatically starts Play
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
etc.) information on the radio display.
faceplate may be used to control the iPod威 or external
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
USB device and display data:
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
previous track.
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
audio device)
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
Controlling The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
Using Radio Buttons
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
will jump to the previous track in the list or press the
To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access
VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of the
current track.
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF>> button.
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five sec- • Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 device scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
onds.
each track in the current list and then forward to the
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons to jump to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK>> button
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
<< SEEK and SEEK>> buttons will select the previous
Track⬙.
and next tracks.
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 or external USB
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
device or external USB device.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
played is highlighted on the radio display, press the
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight
delay in updating the information on the radio
display may be noticeable.
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom
of the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or
external USB device.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Selecting Different Audio Device
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the 1. Press PHONE button to begin.
Uconnect威 phone system.
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on 3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect威
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
phone system to list audio devices.
Streaming Audio”.
Next Track
Play Mode
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but music on your cellular phone.
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect威 Previous Track
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
Uconnect威 phone system, but just one can be selected the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
and played.
previous track music on your cellular phone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Browse
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
current song that is playing will display info.
UCONNECT姞 MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — If
Equipped
Getting Started
• Screen(s) located in the overhead console: Unfold the
overhead LCD screen(s) by pushing the button on the
overhead console behind the screen(s).
Video Entertainment System (VES)™
• Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with either a standard
DVD player or a Blu-Ray Disc Player. If equipped with
a Blu-Ray Disc Player, the icon will be present on the
Player.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
• Turn on the Player (if equipped on Dual Screen Sys- Blu-Ray Player
tem) by pushing the Power button, located on the far
Play A Blu-Ray Disc
left, or by pressing the button on the Remote Control.
To view a Blu-Ray insert the disc into the Blu-Ray VES™
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD is disc Player. Playback will begin automatically after the
inserted into the VES™ player, the screen(s) turn(s) on Blu-Ray is recognized by the disc drive. If playback does
automatically, the headphone transmitters turn on and not begin automatically after the disc is inserted into the
playback begins.
Blu-Ray player press the play button. If playback does
• For Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 on the not begin automatically after the disc is inserted into
Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 1 Blu-Ray VES™ disc Player follow these steps:
(second row) and Channel 2 on the Remote Control Using the Touch-Screen Radio
and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (third row). Refer to
• Press the MENU hard-key, then touch the Rear VES™
the Dual Video Screen section for more information.
soft key. If a chapter list appears on the right side of the
• The system can be controlled by the front seat occuscreen, touch the hide list soft key to display the Rear
pants using either the touch-screen- radio, the DVD or
VES™ control screen.
Blu-Ray Disc Player, or by the rear seat occupants
• Touch the 1 soft-key to select an audio channel, then
using the remote control.
touch the VES™ Disc soft-key in the media column.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using the Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Channel 1 for 2nd row screen
and Channel 2 for 3rd row screen), then press the
source key and select VES™ Disc from the menu.
• Press popup/menu key to navigate disc menu and
options.
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
input jacks (1 set or 2 depending on vehicle) located on
the back of the center console or on left side behind the
second row seat.
1. Video In – Yellow
2. Left Audio In – White
3. Right Audio In – Red
4. AUX 2 Inputs (If Equipped)
5. Power Outlet
6. Power Inverter
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be 2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX
1 or 2 (depending which AUX input the gaming
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™
console is plugged into), by either pressing Up/
jacks:
Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly pressing
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playstathe MODE button, then press ENTER on the Remote
tion3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
Control.
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter
section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more
information.
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 1.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE/SOURCE button on the Remote
Control.
Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Touch the 1 soft-key and then touch either AUX 1 or
AUX 2 in the VES column (depending which AUX
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
input is used). To exit press the back arrow soft-key at
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
the top of the screen.
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
Select Channel/Screen 1 And
AUX 1 In The VES Column
Rear VES Soft-key
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE/SOURCE button on the Remote
Control and the Mode Select Screen will display,
unless a video is playing then only a small banner will
appear on the bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
Select FM Mode On The VES Screen
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
the desired audio source or repeatedly press the Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
MODE/SOURCE button on the remote until the de1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
sired audio source appears on the screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES 3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
video is playing on Channel 1, touch the 2 soft-key and
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
choose an audio source. To exit touch the back arrow
soft-key at the top left of the left screen.
Rear VES Soft-Key
Select Channel/Screen 2 And
HDD In The Media Column
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
switch is on Channel 1.
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES)™.
4. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers,
• The Remote Control
ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is
on Channel 2.
• The Touch-Screen Radio (If Equipped)
Dual Video Screen
Using The Remote Control
Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio
1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the 1. Press the MODE/SOURCE button on the Remote
radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).
Control.
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight DISC by NOTE:
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
repeatedly pressing the SOURCE button, then press
on the left side of the screen.
ENTER/OK.
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
on the right side of the screen.
• The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off.
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
NOTE:
• To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
• Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in
tions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,
the MEDIA column. To exit touch the back arrow at
FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner
the top left of the screen.
will turn off the remote control screen functions.
Rear VES Soft-key
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight VES DISC by
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
1. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The VES™
repeatedly pressing the MODE/SOURCE button, then
player automatically selects the appropriate mode
press ENTER/OK on the Remote Control.
after the disc is recognized and starts playing the
DVD.
Play A DVD Using The VES™ Player (If Equipped)
NOTE: The VES™ player has basic DVD control function such as Menu, Play, Pause, FF, RW and Stop
2. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
switch is on Channel 1.
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers,
ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is
on Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
Select VES DISC Mode On The VES Screen
1. Press the MODE/SOURCE button on the Remote
Control.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
on the right side of the screen.
• The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off.
4
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, touch the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Rear VES Soft-key
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in NOTE:
the VES column. To exit touch the back arrow soft-key
• To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
at the top left of the screen.
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is
Playing
Select Channel/Screen 1 And DISC In The VES Column
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch are on
the same channel. If watching a video on Screen 1
(second row), then Channel 2 could be used for audio. If
watching a video on Screen 2 (third row), then Channel 1
could be used for audio.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE/SOURCE button on the Remote
Control and the Mode Select Screen will display,
unless a video is playing then only a small banner will
appear on the bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
the desired audio source or repeatedly press the
MODE/SOURCE button on the remote until the desired audio source appears on the screen.
4
Select FM Mode On The VES Screen
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES 3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
video is playing on Channel 1, touch the 2 soft-key and
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
choose an audio source. To exit touch the back arrow
soft-key at the top left of the left screen.
Rear VES Soft-Key
Select Channel/Screen 2 And
HDD In The Media Column
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
Third Row Swivel Screen (If Equipped)
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
• The third row screen or Screen 2 has the ability to • VES is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio
lower and swivel to face forward.
and video simultaneously.
• While the swivel screen is facing forward, the second • The Blu-Ray DVD Player can play CDs, DVDs and
row screen or Screen 1 must be fully open in order for
Blu-Ray Discs.
the swivel screen (Screen 2) to work.
• The DVD Player can play CDs and DVDs.
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1
and the right side equates to Channel 2.
• Selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
source will display on the second row screen or Screen
1 and can be heard on Channel 1.
• Selecting a video source on Channel 2, the video
source will display on the third row screen or Screen 2
and can be heard on Channel 2.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The 2nd row screen and 3rd row screen of the Video VES Remote Control – If Equipped
Entertainment System can play two separate discs by
utilizing the touch-screen radio DVD player and BluRay Disc Player.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the screen(s) are closed.
Remote Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
Controls And Indicators
switch is in the Channel 2, position the remote controls
the functionality of headphone Channel 2 (left side of
the screen).
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power 5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward
through the current audio track or video chapter. In
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the
previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
the start of the current or previous audio track or
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after
video chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the
five seconds.
menu.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which
7. POP UP/MENU – Press to return to the main menu of
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
a DVD disc, to select a satellite audio channel from the
When the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position,
Station list, or select playback modes (SCAN/
the remote controls the functionality of headphone
RANDOM for a CD).
Channel 1 (right side of the screen). When the selector
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play. 13. STATUS – If Equipped – Press to display the current
status.
9. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play
14. MODE/SOURCE – Press to change the mode of the
10. PROG Up/Down / Rewind/skip back and fast fwd/
selected channel. See the Mode Selection section of
skip forward – When listening to a radio mode,
this manual for details on changing modes.
pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and pressing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in 15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP
button to access the display settings (see the display
the radio. When listening to compressed audio on a
data disc, PROG Up selects the next directory and
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select
the menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded
PROG Down selects the previous directory. When
in the DVD player (if equipped) and the VES™ mode
listening to a disc in a radio with a multiple-disc
changer, PROG Up selects the next disc and PROG
is selected and the disc is stopped, press the SETUP
button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD
Down selects the previous disc.
Setup Menu of this manual.)
11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio output
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to
for the selected channel.
return to the previous screen. When navigating a
12. SLOW – If Equipped – Press to slow playback of a
DVDs disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s
DVD disc. Press play (䉴) to resume normal play.
contents.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous
tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast
rewind through the current audio track or video
chapter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the
two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back
into position.
18. ENTER/OK – Press to select the highlighted option
in a menu.
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the
next station. In disc modes, press to advance to the
next audio track or video chapter. In menu modes,
use to navigate in the menu.
4
Remote Control Storage
The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compartment for the remote control which is accessible when the
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very
difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
The Remote Control Storage
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
• To disable the Remote Control from making any
changes, press the Video Lock button on the DVD
player (if equipped). If the vehicle is not equipped
with a DVD player, follow the radio’s instructions to
turn Video Lock on. The radio and the video screen(s)
indicate when Video Lock is active.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
• Pressing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition do so for themselves.
OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
operation of the VES™.
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
position and that the channel is not muted and the
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op- headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
eration. To replace the batteries:
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
• Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone
selector switch.
NOTE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Volume Control
Power Button
Channel Selection Switch
Power Indicator
• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned to
the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.
• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned to
the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
Controls
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Press the MODE/SOURCE button on the remote Replacing The Headphone Batteries
control.
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such operation. To replace the batteries:
as a DVD Video), pressing DISPLAY shows the status • Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen.
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
Pressing the MODE/SOURCE button will advance to
downward.
the next mode. When the mode is in an audio only
source (such as FM), the Mode Selection menu appears • Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
on screen.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, • Replace the battery compartment cover.
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navi- Unwired姞 Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
gate to the available modes and press the OK button to Warranty
select the new mode.
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this
BACK button on the remote control.
particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wireless headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
as long as you own the Product.
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Will Unwired威 Do? Unwired威, at its option, will
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired威 redoes not cover any damage or defect that results from
serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replaceEXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARTECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
RANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTWARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, If you have any questions or comments regarding your
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PU- Unwired威 wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR 3332 or email [email protected]
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may register your Unwired威 wireless headphones changed to a mode that is different from the VES™
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at selected radio mode. When shared, the radio has priority
over the VES™ or all radio modes (FM, AM, and SAT).
1-888-293-3332.
The VES™ has the ability to switch tuner (AM/FM),
System Information
SEEK, SCAN, TUNE, and recall presets in radio modes as
long as it is not in shared mode.
Shared Modes
This allows the VES™ to output radio sources to the
headphones and the radio to output VES™ sources to the
vehicle speakers. When the radio and VES™ channel 1 or
2 are in the same (shared) mode, a VES™ icon will be
visible on the radio’s display for that channel, and the
shared icon will be visible on the VES™ screen. When in
shared mode, the same audio source is heard in the
shared headphone channel 1 or channel 2.
When in shared disc mode both the radio and the VES™
have control of the video functions. The VES™ has the
ability to control the following video modes:
1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track
Up/Down.
2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to Disk Up/Down and
program all listed CD controls (Fast Forward, Rewind,
Scan, and Track Up/Down).
If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared
mode with the VES™, only the radio is able to control the The VES™ can even control radio modes or video modes
radio functions. In this case, VES™ can share the radio while the radio is turned off. The VES™ can access the
mode, but not change stations until the radio mode is radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes
on the VES™ and activating a radio mode or disc mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
Information Mode Display
4. Channel 2 Mode
5. Channel 2 Shared Status
6. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute
7. Channel 1 ENTER/OK Button Action
8. Channel 2 ENTER/OK Button Action
9. Clock
10. Video Lock
11. Not Available / Error
12. Disc Changer Status
Information Mode Video Screen Display
1. Channel 1 Mode
2. Channel 1 Shared Status
3. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Numeric Keypad Menu
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2
shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control’s OK
button activates a numeric keypad menu. This screen
makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency, satellite
channel, or track number. To enter the desired digit:
1. Press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲,
䉴, 䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote control’s ENTER/OK button to select the digit. Repeat
these steps until all digits are entered.
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and
press the remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
Numeric Keypad Menu
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go
button and press the remote control’s ENTER/OK
button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
Station List Menu
Disc Menu
When listening to Satellite audio, pressing the remote
control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a list of all
available channels. Navigate this list using the remote
control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to find the desired
station, press the remote control’s ENTER/OK button to
tune to that station. To jump through the list more
quickly, navigate to the Page Up and Page Down icons on
the screen.
4
Disc Menu For CDs
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing
the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
list of all commands which control playback of the disc. When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
Using the options you can activate or cancel Scan play in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the remote
and Random play.
control’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings
menu. These settings control the appearance of the video
Display Settings
on the screen. The factory default settings are already set
for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these
settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then press the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and press the remote control’s ENTER/OK
button.
Video Screen Display Settings
Disc Features control the remote DVD player’s (if
equipped) settings of DVD being watched in the remote
player.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
screen closed:
are installed in the headphones.
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
Disc Formats
• Close the video screen.
The VES™ DVD player is capable of playing the follow• To change the current audio mode, press the remote ing types of discs (12 mm or 8 mm diameter):
control’s MODE/SOURCE button. This will automati• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
cally select the next available audio mode without
notes about DVD Region Codes)
using the Mode/Source Select menu.
• DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only)
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate • Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
display menu or media.
• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
format files
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DVD Region Codes
Recorded Discs
The VES™ DVD player and many DVD discs are coded
by geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the player, the
disc will not play and will be ejected.
The VES™ DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not supported.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the VES™ DVD
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
the disc or to another mode.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the VES™ DVD player may not be able to
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
help avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines when recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
closed are playable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD- Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
each track number is unique.
DVD player.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files
supported.
from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
• The DVD player always uses the file extension to
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or
⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
these extensions for any other types of files.
playable in the VES™ DVD player, check with the disc
recording software publisher for more information about • For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
burning playable discs.
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those down- • To change the current directory, use the remote conloaded from many online music stores) will not play.
trol’s PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/skip
back and fast fwd/skip forward.
The DVD player will automatically skip the file and
begin playing the next available file.
Disc Errors
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD
message is displayed on the VES™ and Radio displays
player will automatically skip the file and begin playand the disc is automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or
ing the next available file.
incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended ⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
supported. For both formats, the recommended
skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the
DVD player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next file, or first track.
the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current or
previous file.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot Display
conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior tempera- Other Language Setup
ture is above 120°F. When this occurs, the DVD player
will display ⬙VES High Temp⬙ and will shut off the VES™
displays until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD
player.
4
DVD Player Language Menu
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
All of the Language settings have a special ⬙Other⬙ setting
to accommodate languages other than Japanese or English. These languages are selected using a special fourdigit code.
To enter a new language code, activate the DVD Setup
Menu. To enter DVD Setup Menu stop the DVD, enter
radio disc mode, then DVD setup and follow these
additional instructions:
selecting the digit, press the remote control’s Right
cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this digit
selection sequence for all four digits.
• When the entire four-digit code is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the language
code is not valid, the numbers all change back to ⬙夡⬙.
If the digits are visible after this step, then the language code is valid.
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but- Here is an abbreviated list of language codes. For more
tons, highlight the Language item you want to edit, language codes, please contact the dealer where the
and then press the remote control ENTER/OK button. vehicle was purchased.
• Using the remote control Down cursor button, select
the ⬙Other⬙ setting, then press the remote control’s
Right cursor button to begin editing the setting.
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons, select a digit for the current position. After
Language
Dutch
German
Portuguese
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Code
2311
1304
2519
Language
French
Italian
Spanish
Code
1517
1819
1418
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
Rating and Password Setup
The Rating and Password settings work together to control
the types of DVDs that your family watches. Most DVDVideo discs have a rating (from 1 to 8) assigned to them
where lower numbers are designated for all audiences and
higher numbers are designated for more adult audiences.
The default rating is Level 8 (play all discs without a
password) and the default password is 0000.
4
When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its rating is compared
to the setting in the DVD player. If the rating of the disc
is higher than the setting in the player, a Password screen
is displayed. In order to watch the disc, the rear passenger must enter the correct password using the password
entry method described below.
To play all discs without requiring a password, set the
DVD player’s rating to Level 8. Setting the rating to Level
1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc.
Not all DVD discs encode a Rating, so it is still possible
that discs designed for adult audiences can still play
without requiring a password.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
DVD Password Entry
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To set the password, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • After the four-digit password is entered, press the remote
follow these additional instructions:
control’s ENTER/OK button to accept the change.
• Using the remote control Left and Right cursor buttons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Password⬙, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the
value for the current digit, and then press the remote
control’s Right cursor button to select the next digit.
Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits.
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the password
is correct, the set password screen is displayed.
• Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
buttons to set the value for the current digit and the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select digits,
enter the new password.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
DVD Player Level Menu
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
To set the rating, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
follow these additional instructions:
buttons, select the new rating level, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button to accept the
• Using the remote control’s Left and Right cursor
change.
buttons, select the Rating tab.
Product Agreement
• Highlight ⬙Change Rating⬙, and then press the remote
This product incorporates copyright protection technolcontrol’s ENTER/OK button.
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons to set technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
the value for the current digit, and then press the intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherremote control’s Right cursor button to select the next wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four disassembly is prohibited.
digits.
Dolby威 Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙, ⬙MLP
remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the password Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
is correct, the Rating Level menu is displayed.
Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right
reserved.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
General Information
This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear Radio Operation
surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
o’clock positions.
listenable station, and pressing the bottom of the switch
The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound The button located in the center of the left-hand switch
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase will tune to the next preset station that you have prothe volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes
the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD CD Player
mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
center. The function of the left-hand switch is different, will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
depending on which mode you are in.
after the current track begins to play.
The following describes the left-hand rocker switch opIf you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
eration in each mode.
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no
function in this mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particuTo keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
precautions:
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect威 (if equipped).
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
With the Three-Zone Temperature Control system, each
front seat occupant can independently control the HeatThe Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
ing, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning operations coming
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
from the outlets on their side of the vehicle.
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
instrument panel, below the radio.
climate control unit located on the instrument panel.
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System —
When the front control is in any position other than rear,
If Equipped
the front control operates all the rear functions.
The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain
a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These
comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior
conditions.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit operation. Rear Panel mode is automatically selected when the
front control is in the Panel mode. When the front unit is
in Bi-Level mode, airflow will be emitted from both the
upper and lower rear outlets. When the front control is in
Floor, Defrost, or Mix modes, airflow will be directed out
of the rear floor outlets.
Manual Temperature Control
1. Left Front Temperature Control
• Provides left front seat occupant with independent
temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for
warmer temperature settings.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
2. Rear Blower Control — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position. Blower control should be left in the ⬙ON⬙
position to allow the climate control to either warm or
cool the vehicle.
• Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the rear system in any mode you select. The
rear blower speed increases as you move the control to
the right from the “O” (Off) position. There are seven
blower speeds. To allow the rear overhead control,
turn blower knob fully to the left, past The ⬙O⬙ off 4. Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped
position into the “REAR” control position.
• Provides temperature control for the rear cabin. Turn
3. Front Blower Control
left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings
in the rear cabin.
• Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the system in any mode you select. The 5. Right Front Temperature Control
blower speed increases as you move the control to the • Provides right front seat occupant with independent
right from the “O” (Off) position. There are seven
temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for
blower speeds.
warmer temperature settings.
6. Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort, defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes.
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
7. Front Defrost Mode
NOTE:
Air is directed through the windshield and side • You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
time.
windshield and side window defrosting.
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear winNOTE: The air conditioning compressor may operate in
dow defroster only when the engine is operating.
Mix and Defrost, or a blend of these modes even if the
A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to
CAUTION!
help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
these modes only when necessary.
the heating elements:
8. Electronic Rear Window Defrost
Press this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
9. Recirculation Control Button
mode to temporarily block out any outside odors, smoke,
or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial
start-up in very hot or humid weather.
NOTE:
• If the Recirculation button is pressed when the system
is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED indicator will
flash 3 times to indicate Recirculation mode is not
allowed.
• In Floor and Mix mode the system will turn off
Recirculation mode after five minutes of operation.
You can select Recirculation mode again if desired.
•
Press this button to choose between outside air
intake or recirculation of the air inside the
vehicle. A lamp will illuminate when you are in
•
Recirculation mode. Only use the Recirculation
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
defogging, select the outside air position.
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
• In order to prevent fogging, when the Recirculation 11. Floor Mode Button
button is pressed and the mode control is set to Panel,
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
the A/C will engage automatically.
small amount through the defrost and side win• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb- dow demist outlets.
ing the mode control selection.
12. Bi-Level Mode Button
10. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Press and release to change the current setting.
The indicator illuminates when ON.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in
any conditions other than full cold or full hot), between
the upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems warmer air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con- improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431
13. Panel Mode Button
Max A/C
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru- For maximum cooling use the A/C and Recirculation
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted for mode buttons at the same time.
direction, and turned on or off to control airflow.
Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center The Rear Manual Climate Control system has floor air
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door, and
seat passengers.
overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position.
The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and
upper outlets.
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to
turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
Floor modes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear Rear Blower Control
seat passengers are located in the headliner, near the The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
center of the vehicle.
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel behind the third row seats.
The heater outlets are located in the right side trim
panel, just behind the sliding door. Do not block or
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
1 – Rear Blower
2 – Rear Temperature
3 – Rear Mode
4 – Rear Climate Control Lock
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433
Rear Temperature Control
Headliner Mode
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the tempera- direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
ture. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the to one side will shut off the airflow.
front ATC panel.
Bi-Level Mode
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob
floor outlets.
is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
ignored.
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headRear Mode Control
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Auto Mode
Floor Mode
• The rear system automatically maintains the correct
Air comes from the floor outlets.
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat
occupants.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
• Front Three-Zone ATC allows both driver and front
passenger seat occupant, and rear seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.
recirculation and the airflow direction. This maintains a
comfortable temperature, even under changing conditions.
• When occupants in the vehicle select the AUTO mode
operation, a comfort temperature can be set by using
the temperature up and down buttons, and the auto
blower operation will be set automatically.
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
• SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones,
allowing one comfort setting (driver setting) for the
cabin, if desired.
The Three-Zone ATC system automatically maintains the
interior comfort level desired by the driver and all
passengers. The system automatically adjusts the air
temperature, the airflow volume, amount of outside air
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Front ATC Panel
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435
1. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
6. Auto Indicator
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning This indicates when the system is in Auto mode.
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. 7. Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
This display shows the temperature setting for the right
into manual mode.
front seat occupant.
2. Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
8. Front Defrost Button
This display shows the temperature setting for the left
Press and release to change the current setting, the
front seat occupant.
indicator illuminates when ON. Performing this function
3. Mode Display
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The
This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel, blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is
selected.
Bi-Level, Floor, Mix).
4. Blower Control Display
9. Passenger Temperature Control Up/Down Button
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or
the lower button for cooler temperature settings.
5. Front Auto Indicator
This indicates when the system is in Front Auto mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
13. Climate Control OFF Button
10. Rear Control Button
Provides toggle operation between front control screen Press and release to turn the Climate Control OFF.
and rear control screen. Push the button to activate the 14. Blower Control
rear climate control screen and allow the front seat
There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed inoccupants control over the rear climate settings.
creases as you move the control to the right from the
11. Rear Lock
lowest blower setting. Performing this function will
Press and release the Rear Lock button on the front ATC cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
panel to lock and unlock the rear climate controls.
15. Mode Control Button
12. Auto Temperature Control Button
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
more information. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes.
Press and release to select between Modes (Panel, BiLevel, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the
ATC to switch into manual mode.
16. Recirculation Control Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437
17. SYNC Button
Press and release to control the temperature setting for all
three zones from the driver temperature control.
• To return to Front screen, press ⬙REAR” button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
18. Driver Temperature Control Up/Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or the
lower button for cooler temperature settings.
4
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
• Press ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control 1. Mode Display
mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control func- This display shows the current Mode selection.
tions now operate rear system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain, by adjusting the driver, front
This display shows the temperature setting for the rear
passenger, and rear seat rotary temperature knobs.
seat occupants.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system
3. Blower Control Display
will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
4. Rear Auto Indicator
not necessary to change the settings. You will experiThis indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode.
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
Automatic Operation
2. Rear Temperature Display
1. Press the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel and the NOTE:
words Front Auto will illuminate in the front ATC • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
display, along with two temperatures for the driver
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
and front passenger. The system will then automatithe temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
cally regulate the amount of airflow.
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec- NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer- mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Programmable Features” in this Section.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic Floor Mode
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
Air comes from the floor outlets.
on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by chang- Manual Operation
ing the front blower knob setting
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
Rear Mode Control
be turned off when the system is being used in the
Headliner Mode
manual mode.
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
the temperature doors will continue to operate automatito one side will shut off the airflow.
cally.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Panel Mode
Blower Control
There are seven fixed blower speeds.
Use the outer dial control to regulate
the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control clockwise and decreases
when you move the control
counter-clockwise.
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted for
direction, and turned on or off to control airflow.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control outer dial. The fan will now
operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are
selected. This allows the front occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
Auto mode.
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost outlets. A slight amount of air
is also directed through the side window demister
outlets.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
seat passengers.
Bi-Level Mode
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
by selecting one of the following positions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
ice on the windshield. DEFROST mode must be manually
of air is directed through the defrost and side
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
window demister outlets.
Air Conditioning (A/C)
Mix Mode
• The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operaAir comes from the floor, defrost and side window
tor to manually activate or deactivate the air condidemist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
tioning system. When in A/C mode and the ATC is set
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable,
to a cool temperature, dehumidified air flows through
while keeping the windshield clear.
the air outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the
Defrost Mode
A/C button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC
display and deactivate the A/C system.
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with maxi- NOTE:
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind• If the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C
shield and side window defrosting.
can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
Floor Mode
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
442 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
Equipped
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear of the
right side sliding door, and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
air through the headliner outlets.
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. Re- The rear system temperature control is on the front ATC
circulation mode should only be used temporarily. A LED panel located on the instrument panel.
will illuminate on the Recirculation control button when
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front
Recirculation mode is selected. Push the button a second
ATC panel, illuminates a lock symbol in the rear display.
time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow
The rear temperature and air source are controlled from
outside air into the vehicle.
the front ATC panel.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
off.
clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected.
Recirculation Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 443
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, near the 1. Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front
center of the vehicle.
ATC panel. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock
icon in the rear temperature knob.
2. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
3. ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Rear ATC Control Features
1 - Blower Speed
2 - Rear Temperature
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
3 - Rear Mode
4 - Rear Temperature Lock
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
444 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — CustomerProgrammable Features” in this Section.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel behind the third row seats.
The rear outlets are located in the right side trim
panel of the 3rd Row seat. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing
damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the
front ATC panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 445
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob
is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are
ignored.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Rear Mode Control
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Auto Mode
Summer Operation
The rear system automatically maintains the correct mode
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
and comfort level desired by the rear seat occupants.
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
Headliner Mode
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
446 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Winter Operation
Vacation/Storage
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in
fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 447
Outside Air Intake
A/C Air Filter
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control (ATC), the climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Refer to “Air Conditioning” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement
instructions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ – If Equipped . . . . . . . .454
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .461
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .463
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .459
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .496
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .497
䡵 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) . . . . . . . . .479 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . .502
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .481
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .505
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ All Season Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped. .506
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .515
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .507
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .512
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .514
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .520
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .525
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .528
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .551
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
▫ Recreational Towing – All Models . . . . . . . . . .552
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ – If Equipped
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-NGo™ FOBIK is in the passenger compartment.
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
Installing And Removing The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Installing The Button
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF
position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
Normal Starting
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and read- 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
able.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
position.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
Removing The Button
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, press the button again.
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
the button loose.
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
OFF position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Functions – With Driver’s
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/ Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle Or NEUTRAL Position)
speed must be below 5 mph (8 km/h) before the The Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature operates similar to an
engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in and START. To change the ignition switch positions
PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the follow these steps.
ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the
EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle Not In • Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
Park” message and the engine will remain running. • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
could roll.
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time If Engine Fails To Start
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
WARNING!
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob With
Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proceIf the engine fails to start after you have followed the
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
hold it.
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
release it as soon as the starter engages.
hold it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal,
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver’s side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap
After Starting
that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
Module.
decrease as the engine warms up.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the shift lever is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Key Ignition Park Interlock
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the OFF
position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the OFF position, and the
shift lever is locked in PARK whenever the ignition
switch is in the OFF position.
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode is engaged, the
The Fuel Economy (ECON) mode can improve the vehi- vehicle control systems will change the following:
cle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving condi- • The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
tions. Press the “econ” switch in the center stack of the
later.
instrument panel and a green light will indicate the
• The transmission will skip select gears during shifts to
ECON mode is engaged.
allow the engine to operate at lower speeds.
Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode
• The torque converter clutch will engage at lower
engine speeds and remain on longer.
• The engine idle speed will be lower.
• The overall driving performance will be more
conservative.
• Some ECON mode functions may be temporarily
inhibited based on temperature and other factors.
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must
press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK
(Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in
this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or
NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
Shift Lever
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the shift lever between these gears.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (described later in this section). Moving the shift lever to the left or right (–/+) while in the
DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear, and will display that gear in the instrument
cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Gear Ranges
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK. As an added precaution,
turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and turn the engine OFF. When the ignition is in
the OFF position, the shift lever is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
third, and fourth gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive
sixth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control (described below) to select a
lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to third gear only. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the service is required.
following steps:
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
1. Stop the vehicle.
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
not shift above third gear (except to prevent engine
overspeed), but will shift down into second and first gear
normally.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the engine OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE the right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the shift
position, the transmission will operate automatically, lever position indicator in the instrument cluster.
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the shift
lever to the left (-) will activate ERS mode, display the
WARNING!
current gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain that
gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
the shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) will change the top slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
available gear.
or personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Odometer Screen Display
Actual Gear(s) Allowed
1
1
2
1–2
3
1–3
4
1–4
5
1–5
6
1–6
D
1–6
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum • the engine coolant has reached an adequate
temperature,
deceleration (engine braking), tap the shift lever to the
left (-) repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The transmission
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be
• the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
slowed down.
Overdrive Operation
Torque Converter Clutch
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the following conditions are present:
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
temperature,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
WARNING!
the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demon- (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
strate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of
Traction
Overdrive.
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
Acceleration
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip- complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs be observed:
when there is a difference in the surface traction under 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
the front (driving) wheels.
slushy.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. Flowing/Rising Water
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
Shallow Standing Water
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
POWER STEERING
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticidoes not in any way damage the steering system.
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
Parking Brake
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake the instrument cluster will illuminate.
disengage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You may experience the following when the brake system
goes into anti-lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop)
• A clicking sound of solenoid valves
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Brake pedal pulsations
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop
WARNING!
• The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible
to interference caused by improperly installed, or
high output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock
braking capability. Installation of such equipment
should be performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
WARNING! (Continued)
• The Anti-Lock Brake System cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors the anti-lock brake system. The light will
come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb
repaired as soon as possible.
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or Consult with your authorized dealer service center as
soon as possible.
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Traction Control
Warning Light” is not on.
System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS) and Electronic
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake Stability Control (ESC), Trailer Sway Control (TSC), and
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore Hill Start Assist (HSA). These systems complement the
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by optimizing the vehicle
braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount
of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin
is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping
wheel(s) and engine power is reduced, to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
functions similarly to a limited-slip differential, and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
the ESC is in the “Partial Off” mode.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (in
the instrument cluster) will start to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin. This
indicates that the TCS is active. If the indicator light
flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt
your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions,
and do not switch off the ESC or TCS.
WARNING!
• The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded.
• The TCS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
Brake Assist System (BAS)
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize
the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake
application, and then applies optimum pressure to the
brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various
driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
ESC Operating Modes
ESC Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
The “ESC Off” switch is located in the center Off” switch.
switch bank, next to the hazard flasher switch.
When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC,
except for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCS
section, has been disabled and the “ESC OFF Indicator
ESC On
Light” will be illuminated. When in the “Partial Off”
This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC on mode, ESC will operate without engine torque managetwo-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is ment. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in
started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel
should be used for most driving situations. ESC should spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain
only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below.
traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the
“ESC Off” switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On”
mode of operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
• When in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the ⴖESC Off Indicator Lightⴖ will be illuminated.
When in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should turn off with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
that caused the ESC activation.
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excesNOTE:
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the approand the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momenpriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
will become active automatically once an excessively
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is rewill be ON even if it was turned off previously.
quired. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
engine power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to
stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not following steps:
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90
seconds.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Release the clutch pedal (if equipped).
If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be 6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
7. Press the “ESC Off” switch (located in the lower Towing With HSA
switch bank below the climate controls) four times HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
within 20 seconds. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction when pulling a trailer.
Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off two
times.
WARNING!
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional half-turn to the right.
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
is disabled.
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to it’s previous setting.
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
WARNING! (Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
and using the parking brake, it will roll down the
hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Tire Markings
5
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa- • Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempotion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Exdesign standards. Tires designed to this standard have
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
5
Tire Placard Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
Tire and Loading Information Placard
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuaxles must not be exceeded. For further information on
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the weight referenced here.
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750
= 650 lbs [295 kg]).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE:
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• The following table shows examples on how to calcusafely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
capacity calculated in Step 4.
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
manual to determine how this reduces the available
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Economy
Tire Inflation Pressures
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well
as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at
least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge
to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not outside temperature condition.
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire combine them with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
and cold tire inflation pressures.
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
All Season Tires – If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle.
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
tire inflation pressures.
your vehicle.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
Snow Tires
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states produring the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
CAUTION!
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
tire rotation pattern.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipcompact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempothe Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo80D18 103M.
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip- Full Size Spare – If Equipped
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Tire Spinning
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
first opportunity.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopWARNING!
ping when you are stuck.
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
replaced.
Life Of Tire
Tread Wear Indicators
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires, typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
those of the original wheels.
Replacement Tires
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage:
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
• Install on front tires only.
• 225/65R16 and 235/60R16 tires with the use of a
traction device that meets the SAE type “Class S”
specification is recommended.
• Due to limited clearance, P225/65R17 and 225/65R17
tires with a Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6
low profile traction device or equivalent is
recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
unequal rates.
reversed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer
to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate
the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as
the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
Tire Rotation
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure threshold for any reason, including low temperature
based on the cold inflation tire placard pressure require- effects, or natural air pressure loss through the tire.
ments found on the tire placard label located on the
driver’s-side B-pillar.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure
in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
to be turned off. The system will automatically update
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been
received.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire placard
pressure of 35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is
68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207
kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the
tire pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30
psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will still be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this inforplacard pressure value.
mation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
NOTE:
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
not use aftermarket sealants or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage
to the sensors may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPMS sensor.
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, using an accurate tire pressure
gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire Pressure
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in Warnings
the tire.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a
Base System
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will display
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levwill be activated when one or more of the four active
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of
Module.
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the vehicle’s recommended cold tire placard pressure value
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain (located on the placard label on the driver’s-side B-Pillar).
the proper pressure.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once
The Basic TPMS consists of the following components:
the updated tire pressures have been received.
• Receiver Module
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
• TPMS Telltale Warning Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash Vehicles With Compact Spare
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
TPMS sensor. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the
a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
pressure in the compact spare tire.
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnoccur with any of the following scenarios:
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime
will sound, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
be displayed and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tellfacilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
tale Light” will turn on.
TPMS sensors.
3. After driving for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
(24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
that affects radio wave signals.
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
remain on solid.
the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
Premium System – If Equipped
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rimmounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare Module.
tire, the TPMS will automatically update, and the “Tire NOTE: It is particularly important to regularly check
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off as and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires.
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
The Premium TPMS consists of the following compowarning limit in any of the four active road tires.
nents:
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) for the TPMS to receive • Receiver Module
this information.
• Four TPMS Sensors
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and graphics
displaying tire pressures
• TPMS Telltale Warning Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this inforThe “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illumimation.
nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Message
pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will display a
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for a minimum of five
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value(s)
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
with the low tire(s) flashing.
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSShould a low tire condition occur on any of the four TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This text
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, message is then followed by a graphic display, with - - in
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic place of the pressure value(s) indicating which TPMS
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure Sensor(s) is not being received.
value. The system will automatically update, the graphic
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinno longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
guish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been reLight” will no longer flash, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
ceived.
TPMS Low Pressure Warnings
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be message is then followed by a graphic display with
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
any of the following scenarios:
but they may not be in the correct vehicle position. The
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
system still needs to be serviced as long as the “SERVICE
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM SYSTEM” message exists.
TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
TPMS. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
pressure in the compact spare tire.
the wheels or wheel housings.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on, the
The EVIC will also display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be displayed, a
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
chime will sound, and the EVIC will still display a
fault possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault
flashing pressure value in the graphic display.
is present. In this case, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
any of the four active road tires.
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
to receive this information.
in place of the pressure value.
General Information
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
solid, and the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM following conditions:
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and • This device may not cause harmful interference.
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
• This device must accept any interference received,
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
including interference that may cause undesired opreinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
eration.
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow- Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
ing licenses:
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
United States
MRXC4W4MA4
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experiCanada
2546A-C4W4MA4
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
before considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
Reformulated Gasoline
CAUTION!
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates not be covered under warranty.
may be used in your vehicle.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• operate in a lean mode
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• poor engine performance
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• poor cold start and cold drivability
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
E-85 perform the following:
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
• change the engine oil and oil filter
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the nia reformulated gasoline.
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
Materials Added To Fuel
CAUTION! (Continued)
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
5
E-85 Fuel Cap
E-85 Badge
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternating between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recommended.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling
• you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km)
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
during warm up.
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
NOTE:
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Parts
ADDING FUEL
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol comleft side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
patible parts.
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
Fuel Filler Cap
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
NOTE: The driver’s side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
fuel door.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system and may
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to
turn on, due to fuel vapors escaping from the
system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking” If the problem continues, the message will appear the
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized
properly tightened.
dealer as soon as possible.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may VEHICLE LOADING
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminthe vehicle is refueled.
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a specified GVWR and GAWR.
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the Vehicle Certification Label
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is heard.
This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly
tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
WARNING!
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Tire Size
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
GVWR.
Rim Size
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
listed.
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
it is not over the GVWR.
Curb Weight
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight separately. It is important that you distribute the load
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full evenly over the front and rear axles.
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
added.
Loading
Overloading
Inflation Pressure
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
and GAWRs.
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
TRAILER TOWING
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
In this section you will find safety tips and information further information.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temand safely as possible.
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a Tongue Weight (TW)
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
supported by the scale.
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles Frontal Area
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- maximum width of the front of a trailer.
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
Trailer Sway Control
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer’s axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier tongue
weights (TW), and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with an
authorized hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable authorized Recreational Vehicle dealer
for additional information.
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
5
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing
Hitch (Incorrect)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Class
Class
Class
Class
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
GCWR (Gross
Combined Weight
Rating)
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg)
Frontal Area
Up to 2 persons &
Luggage 3,600 lbs
(1 633 kg)*
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
3 to 5 persons &
Luggage 3,350 lbs
(1 519 kg)*
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
6 to 7 persons &
Luggage 3,000 lbs
(1 360 kg)*
* For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
3.6L/Automatic
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Weight)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Max. Tongue
Weight
360 lbs (163 kg)
335 lbs (152 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
by 100 lbs (45 kg).
5
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side Consider the following items when computing the
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of • The tongue weight of the trailer.
many trailer collisions.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
put in or on your vehicle.
your bumper or trailer hitch.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Towing Requirements
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive- Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
train components, the following guidelines are recom- proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
mended.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
5
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized .
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
Towing Requirements – Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and OperThis could cause inadequate braking and possible
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
personal injury.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
sures before trailer usage.
required when towing a trailer with electronically
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
brake controller is not required.
proper inspection procedure.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper tire
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
(Continued)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
5
Seven-Pin Connector
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the transBefore setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
mission fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintenance
heavy traffic.
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Automatic Transmission
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
The DRIVE gear can be selected when towing. However,
if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a • When using the speed control, if you experience speed
lower gear range.
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
Towing Tips
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve • Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
maximize fuel efficiency.
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
Cooling System
Highway Driving
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- Reduce speed.
heating, take the following actions:
Air Conditioning
City Driving
Turn off temporarily.
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
All Models
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing – All Models
CAUTION!
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in PARK.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Securing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .555 䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut. . . . . . .557 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Spare Tire Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ Spare Tire Removal Instructions . . . . . . . . . . .561 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
554 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
lower center area of the instrument panel.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
may wear down your battery.
from the engine cooling system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 555
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
6
556 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack, jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed
behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area.
Turn the two cover latches to release the cover.
Jack And Tool Location
Remove the pouch containing the scissors jack, jack
handle, and tools.
Spare Tire Removal
The spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located
under the center of the vehicle between the front doors by
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 557
means of a cable winch mechanism. The “spare tire
drive” nut is located on the floor, under a plastic cap at
the front of the floor console or under front super console
forward bin liner.
To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut
To access the spare tire winch drive nut and lower the
spare tire, you will need to refer to one of the following
center console configurations.
6
Spare Tire Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
558 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Pull the lower drawer out from the rear of the floor
console to gain clear access of the tire winch drive nut.
For vehicles equipped with the Super Console, the spare tire
winch assembly drive nut is located beneath the console.
2. Open the front drawer to expose the storage compartment.
Super Console
3. Remove the liner from the console’s storage compartment to access the spare tire winch drive nut.
Super Console
1 — Lower Drawer
2 — Front Drawer
3 — Front Drawer Liner
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 559
Premium/Base/Cargo Center Console
Pull the Winch Cover assembly plug (if equipped) to
access the winch drive nut.
6
Drive Nut Access
Winch Cover Assembly Plug (If Equipped)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Tools
The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be assembled into a spare tire hook; to remove the compact
spare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle, or a
Winch T-handle; to raise/lower the compact spare tire/
cover assembly.
Assembled T-handle
A — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
B — Extension 1
C — Extension 2
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561
Spare Tire Removal Instructions
The spare tire is located under the vehicle beneath the
center console area.
6
Assembling The Spare Tire Hook
A — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
B — Extension 1
C — Extension 2
Spare Tire And Cover
1. Assemble the spare tire tools into a T-handle and place
the square end over the spare tire winch drive nut.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism
stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack in
the cable to allow you to pull the spare tire out from
underneath the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
3. To remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly,
Pulling Spare Tire
assemble the winch T-handle extensions to form a
NOTE: If either front tire is flat it may be necessary to
spare tire hook, and pull the spare tire out from under
jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire/
the vehicle.
cover assembly from under the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 563
4. Stand the tire/cover assembly upright and remove the Preparations For Jacking
wheel spacer by squeezing the winch retaining tabs
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
together. Push the retainer through the spare tire to
slippery areas.
release it from the wheel.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
Removing Wheel Spacer
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
564 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left
rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 565
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of
“Tires – General Information” for information about the
spare tire, its use, and operation.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
Jack Warning Label
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
566 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill
flange of the vehicle body.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
Rear jack locations are between a pair of down-facing
tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle side body.
Jack Locations
Rear Jacking Locations
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 567
Front jack location is on the sill flange of the vehicle body
and is located 6 in (150 mm) from door edge.
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the
right until the jack head is properly engaged in the
described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until
NOTE: In some situations the jack may need to be
the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
placed on its side in order to be pushed under the vehicle.
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
Return the jack to its correct orientation once it is under
provides maximum stability.
the vehicle.
Front Jack Locations
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
568 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do
not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
hub.
6. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Mounting Spare Tire
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 569
9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact
spare.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left. 10. Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact spare tire
cover assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not stow
8. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
the deflated tire in the spare tire location. Have the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon as posleverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
sible.
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel
nut tightness is 102 ft lbs (138 N·m).If in doubt about 11. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
vehicle. Reassemble the winch handle extensions to
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
form a “T” and fit the winch T-handle over the drive
nut. Rotate the nut to the right until the winch
mechanism clicks at least three times.
NOTE: Refer to the “Spare Tire Tools” section for instructions on assembling the T-handle.
12. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools
back in the stowage compartment.
13. Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as required.
Securing The Spare Tire
WARNING!
A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly, thrown
forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger
the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the compact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place
provided.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
1. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form a
T-handle and fit the winch T-handle over the drive
nut. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mecha- 2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the
nism stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack
spare tire hook, and pull the wheel spacer from under
in the cable to allow you to pull the wheel spacer out
the vehicle.
from under the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571
3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is
down, and place the tire into the spare tire/cover
assembly. Slide the wheel spacer through the center of
the wheel and spare tire/cover assembly, so that the
two retainer tabs snap out and engage the spare tire
cover on the opposite side.
CAUTION!
The compact spare tire/cover assembly must be used
when the compact spare tire is stored. Failure to use
this cover could drastically reduce the life of the
compact spare tire.
WARNING!
Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer
have been properly extended through the center of
the wheel and spare tire/cover assembly. Failure to
properly engage both retainer tabs could result in
loss of the spare tire and cover assembly, which will
cause vehicle damage and may cause loss of vehicle
control.
4. Using the winch T-handle, rotate the drive nut to the
right until the compact spare tire/cover assembly is
drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
5. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear
the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be
overtightened. Check under the vehicle to ensure the
compact spare tire/cover assembly is positioned correctly against the underside of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed specifically to
stow a compact spare tire only. Do not attempt to use
the winch to stow the full size flat tire, or any other
full-size tire. Vehicle damage may result.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
4 — Wheel Cover
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install 1 — Valve Stem
5 — Mounting Stud
the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut 2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the 6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service
lug nuts.
station.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack 2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
handle counterclockwise.
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
handle counterclockwise.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tight- precautions.
ness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service
station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
6
Positive Battery Post
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of
the engine compartment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
battery. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
cables in the reverse sequence:
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
and the fuel injection system.
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
you should have the battery and charging system inthe least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
spected at your authorized dealer.
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control System” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.Once the vehicle has been freed, press the
⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by
excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you are stuck and
do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what
the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
shift lever override access cover (located near the top
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access
right of the shift lever in the instrument panel).
hole, and push and hold the override release lever
forward.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel lift
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Rear
Flatbed
Front
ALL
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
ALL MODELS
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
OK
BEST METHOD
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
NOTE: If the key fob is unavailable, or the battery is
discharged, see ⬙Shift Lever Override⬙ in ⬙What To Do In
Emergencies⬙ for instructions on shifting the automatic
transmission out of PARK for towing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the key fob is unavailable, or the battery is discharged,
see ⬙Shift Lever Override⬙ in ⬙What To Do In Emergencies⬙ for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed
equipment is not available, and the transmission is
operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Damage to the fascia will occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels
OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, or wheel lift
equipment with the front wheels raised).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 mi (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .587
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .588
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .588
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .591
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
▫ Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders . .619
▫ Front Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
▫ Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker And
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . .620
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .633
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND
GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
▫ Quad Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
▫ Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .631
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Filter
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
— Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in ”Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard.
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off.
For states that require an Inspection and MainteIf the problem persists, the message will appear the next
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the
system is ready for testing.
MIL light off.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
of a normal bulb check.
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
WARNING!
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
DEALER SERVICE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are services determined by the engineers who designed your
available which include detailed service information for vehicle.
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
(Continued)
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a Change Engine Oil
fully warmed engine is shut OFF or before starting the The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
engine after it has sat overnight.
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informaimprove the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain tion.
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the NOTE:Under no circumstances should oil change interdipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these whichever occurs first.
engines.
Engine Oil Selection
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
This symbol means that the oil has starting and vehicle fuel economy.
been certified by the American
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
Petroleum Institute (API). The
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
manufacturer only recommends
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine ComAPI Certified engine oils.
partment” illustration in this section.
Synthetic Engine Oils
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi- quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
tives.
filter and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Engine Air Cleaner Filter
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the maintenance intervals.
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
WARNING!
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
your area.
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
Engine Oil Filter
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
at every engine oil change.
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
Engine Oil Filter Selection
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil serious personal injury.
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
Air Conditioner Maintenance
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
the housing.
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position. amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri- windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt seconds to flush out any residual water.
from a dry windshield.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
WARNING!
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend- Commercially available windshield washer solvents
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
performance of blades may be present with chattering, must be exercised when filling or working around
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions the washer solution.
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necesAfter the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
sary.
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. MOPAR威 All
Adding Washer Fluid
Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, used
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine
action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging,
compartment and should be checked at regular intervals.
and is not harmful to paint or trim.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at anytime the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of
the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking , tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antiCoolant Checks
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
CAUTION!
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be replaced with
the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F (−37° C) are
anticipated.
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionintervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replace(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing cool- • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
ant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antioperation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
expansion bottle must also be protected against
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
freezing.
emissions.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested Brake System
for leaks.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at system components should be inspected periodically.
50% OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your maintenance intervals.
engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Rethe “Brake System Warning Light” indicates system fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Mainfailure.
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications. It is
important to maintain the transmission fluid at the
correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical
flushes should be used in any transmission; only the
approved lubricant should be used.
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with
adversely affect seals.
an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
damage.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is
provided. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using a special service dipstick. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission
is disassembled for any reason.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle.
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, • For aluminum wheels, use MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner
(Part# 04796239AB) or equivalent.
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
Equipped
To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a non- Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
• For chrome wheels, use MOPAR威 Chrome Cleaner • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
(Part#04318013) or equivalent.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Cleaning Interior Trim
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean, or a Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivastain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. lent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
clean vinyl upholstery
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recomprotectants on Stain Repel products.
mended for leather upholstery.
Interior Care
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
Instrument Panel Surfaces
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface, can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
use protectants or other products which may cause Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
restore the low glare surface.
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
WARNING!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
Cleaning Headlights
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear winYour vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
lights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
stone breakage than glass headlights.
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore scratch the elements.
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
directly on the mirror.
cloth.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
buckles do not work properly.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be Removal
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
at one edge to ease removal.
rag.
Cleaning
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow
Seat Belt Maintenance
the cleaning procedure below.
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, pull the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
liner from the water and dip it back into the water about
six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse
the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake
the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces
with a clean soft cloth.
Installation
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the
liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the
corresponding openings in the drawer.
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the applicable “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
This center contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A
label that identifies each component may be printed or
embossed on the inside of the cover.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
CAUTION!
• When installing the Totally Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do
so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the
following table.
Cavity
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
40 Amp
Green
MiniFuse
Description
—
Power Folding Seat
—
—
Power Liftgate
Module
Rear Door Module
—
Driver Door Node
—
Passenger Door
Node
Antilock Brakes
Pump/Stability
Control System
—
7
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
J7
J8
J9
J10
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
—
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
—
30 Amp
Pink
—
—
Description
Cavity
Antilock Brakes
Valve/Stability
Control System
Power Memory
Seat – If Equipped
Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle
Motor/Flex Fuel –
If Equipped
Headlamp Wash/
Manifold Tuning
Valve – If Equipped
J11
J12
J13
J14
J15
J17
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
MiniFuse
—
Description
—
Power Sliding Door
Module/Anti–Theft
Module – If
Equipped
HVAC Rear Blower,
Radiator Fan Motor
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) – Main
Rear Window Defogger
Front Blower
—
Starter Solenoid
—
—
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
Cavity
J18
J19
J20
J21
J22
M1
Cartridge
Fuse
20 Amp
Blue
60 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
—
Description
Cavity
M2
M3
—
—
Powertrain Control
Module Trans
Range
Radiator Fan
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
Front Wiper LO/HI
M4
—
—
Front/Rear Washer
M5
—
—
Sunroof Module
M6
—
15 Amp
Blue
Rear Center Brake
Lamp/Brake
Switch
MiniFuse
—
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Front Fog Lamps
Front/Rear Axle
Locker, Vacuum
Pump Motor
Trailer Tow
Inverter
Power Outlet #1
(ACC), Rain Sensor,
Cigar Lighter (Instrument Panel or
with Console Rear)
7
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
M7
Cartridge
Fuse
—
M8
—
M9
—
Cavity
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Cavity
Power Outlet #2
(BATT/ACC SELECT) – Center
Seat or with Console Rear
Front Heated Seat –
If Equipped
Rear Heated Seat –
If Equipped
M10
Cartridge
Fuse
—
M11
—
M12
—
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MiniFuse
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Green
Description
Ignition Off Draw
— Video System,
Satellite Radio,
DVD, Hands-Free
Module, Universal
Garage Door
Opener, Vanity
Lamp, Streaming
Video Module – If
Equipped
Climate Control
System
Amplifier/Radio
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
Cavity
M13
Cartridge
Fuse
—
M14
—
M15
—
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Cavity
Instrument Cluster,
SIREN, Clock Module, Multi-Function
Control Switch – If
Equipped
Trailer Tow – If
Equipped
Rear View Mirror,
Instrument Cluster,
Multi-Function
Control Switch, Tire
Pressure Monitor,
Glow Plug Module
– If Equipped
M16
Cartridge
Fuse
—
M17
—
15 Amp
Blue
M18
—
M19
—
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
Description
Airbag Module/
Occupant Classification Module
Left Tail/License/
Park Lamp, Running Lamps
Right Tail/Park/
Run Lamp
Powertrain
7
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M20
Cartridge
Fuse
—
M21
—
M22
—
M23
—
M24
—
MiniFuse
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Cavity
Instrument Cluster
Interior Light,
Switch Bank, Steering Column Module, Switch Steering
Wheel
Powertrain
M25
Cartridge
Fuse
—
M26
—
10 Amp
Red
M27
—
10 Amp
Red
M28
—
10 Amp
Red
M29
—
10 Amp
Red
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
Horn
Horn
Rear Wiper
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Description
Fuel Pump, Diesel
Lift Pump – If
Equipped
Power Mirror
Switch, Driver Window Switch
Wireless Control
Module, Keyless
Entry Module
Powertrain, Transmission Control
Module
Occupant Classification Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
M30
Cartridge
Fuse
—
M31
—
M32
—
M33
—
Cavity
MiniFuse
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
Cavity
Rear Wiper Module, Power Folding
Mirror
Back-Up Lamps
M34
Cartridge
Fuse
—
M35
—
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
Airbag Module,
THATCHUM – If
Equipped
Powertrain
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10 Amp
Red
Description
Park Assist, Heater
Climate Control
Module, Headlamp
Wash, Compass,
Rear Camera, Door
Lamps, Flashlight,
Relay Diesel Cabin
Heater, Rad Fan
Diesel – If
Equipped
Heated Mirrors
7
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M36
M37
M38
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
—
VEHICLE STORAGE
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Power Outlet #3
(Instrument Panel
or with Console
Center)
Antilock Brakes,
Stability Control,
Stop Lamp, Fuel
Pump
Door Lock/Unlock
Motors, Liftgate
Lock/Unlock Motors
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may do the following:
• Remove the 60 Amp cartridge in the Totally Integrated
Power Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off Draw
(IOD).
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit
breaker located in the Totally Integrated Power Module.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Center & Rear Dome
Lamp
Center & Rear Reading
Lamps
Front Door Courtesy
Lamp
Front Header Reading
Lamps – If Equipped
Instrument Cluster
Lamps
Bulb Number
578
578
578
Liftgate Lamp(s)
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
Removable Console
Lamp – If Equipped
Visor Vanity Lamps
Bulb Number
578
PC579
194
6501966
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
578
7
PC74
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamp – (Low and
High Beam Halogen)
Headlamp (HID – If
Equipped) Low Beam
Fog Lamp – If Equipped
Front Side Marker
Front Park/Turn Signal
Rear Turn Signal Lamp
Rear Tail, Stop, and Side
Marker Lamp
Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp
Backup Lamp
License
BULB REPLACEMENT
Bulb Number
H11
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
D1S
H11
W5W
PY27/7W or 3757A
3757A
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
3157
168
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10
seconds, as the system charges.
Quad Headlamps
1. Raise the hood to access the high or low beam bulbs at
the rear of the headlamp housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Reconnect the wiring connector to the bulb.
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp
2. Release the two tabs on the side of the connector and 1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
remove the connector from the bulb.
housing.
3. Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from the 2. Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the
headlamp housing.
headlamp housing, then pull the bulb out.
4. Install the new headlamp bulb and twist until locked 3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
into the headlamp housing.
socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp
housing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. From behind the bumper fascia, or the access panel on
the air dam, twist the bulb counterclockwise, and
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
remove bulb.
housing.
Front Side Marker Lamp
NOTE: Access is somewhat limited. You may have to
remove the inner fender well or remove the headlamp
housing for bulb replacement.
2. Twist the socket and remove from the headlamp
housing, then pull the bulb out.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
2. Disconnect wire harness from the bulb.
socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp
3. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
housing.
reinstall the bulb by twisting clockwise.
Fog Lamp
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker And
NOTE: Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear of
Backup Lamp
the fascia. On the left rear side of the fascia, remove the
push pin and lower the hinged access door on the air 1. Raise the liftgate.
dam.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
2. Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing the two NOTE:
screws from the inboard side. Use a fiber stick or
• If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is
similar tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side
placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
to disengage the two ball studs.
scratch the paint.
• The PRY location is best closest to the studs while
dislodging them separately.
3. Twist the socket and remove it from the lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
see your authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Twist and remove the socket from the lamp assembly
and pull the bulb out to remove.
The license plate lamp is located under the tailgate light
bar and above the license plate.
3. Push the bulb into the socket, twist the socket into the
lamp assembly and reinstall the lamp assembly into
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
tab on the outboard side of the lamp assembly and
License Lamp
pull down on the lamp assembly for removal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
20 Gallons
Metric
76 Liters
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
5.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10
13.4 Quarts
12.6 Liters
Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Qts (2.8 L) if equipped with a rear
heater.
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your oil filler
cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filters.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 Spark Plugs.
87 Octane
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If
DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威
ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
640 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 641 M
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission as
needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
8
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot
seals, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter.
Replace spark plugs (3.6L engine). **
X
X
X
140,000
150,000
14
15
224,000
240,000
130,000
208,000
120,000
192,000
110,000
176,000
100,000
160,000
90,000
144,000
80,000
128,000
70,000
112,000
60,000
96,000
50,000
80,000
40,000
64,000
30,000
48,000
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
32,000
20,000
M 642 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.
T
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
E
first)
N
A
N
Or Years: 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
C
E
Or Kilometers:
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
X
X
X
X
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 643 M
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10
years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing.
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter(s).
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 644 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
WARNING!
N
T
E • You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
N
A
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
N
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
C
service job, take your vehicle to a competent meE
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .647
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 䡵 MOPAR威 PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .651
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .648
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .648
▫ In Mexico contact: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .652
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
646 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . .653
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 647
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
648 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 247–9753
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 649
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
650 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 651
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
operating at its best.
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer.
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
MOPAR姞 PARTS
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
652 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 653
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
654 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
656 INDEX
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .595
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control. . . . . . . . . .425
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Anti-Theft System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .434
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX 657
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . .
Brake Control System, Electronic
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .27
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Calibration, Compass . . . . . .
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . .
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . .
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)
Carbon Monoxide Warning . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.483
.481
.637
.609
.610
.477
.321
.461
.630
.124
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
...
...
..
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.532
.476
.607
.120
10
658 INDEX
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Checks, Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coat Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Removable . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.353
.287
.288
.457
.424
.507
.342
.342
.343
.339
..
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.377
.377
.338
.288
.288
.252
.292
.649
INDEX 659
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .338
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.607
.604
.606
.635
.604
.607
.605
.608
.608
.607
.607
.605
.614
.276
.647
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
660 INDEX
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . .
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.528
.462
.270
.135
.481
.483
.237
.483
.327
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.554
.555
.574
.554
.589
. . . . .595
. . . . .459
. . . . .119
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX 661
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabric Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . .
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Flashers
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.531
.531
.528
.532
.532
.531
.457
.288
.635
.124
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.613
.610
.604
.476
.636
.223
.632
10
662 INDEX
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) Seating
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . .
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . .
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.197
.578
.524
.532
.527
.525
.338
.462
.525
.320
.320
.524
.320
.324
.527
.525
.524
.524
.338
Tank Capacity
Fuel, Flexible . . .
Fueling . . . . . . .
Fuel Optimizer . .
Fuel Saver . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.635
.528
.532
.338
.338
.620
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) .
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . .
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.257
.532
.525
.524
.338
.525
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.323
.320
.320
.313
.464
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
INDEX 663
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .227
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
.147 HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Hook, Coat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
.473
.554 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
.618 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
.223 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
.227 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
.222 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
.222 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
.192 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect威). . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
664 INDEX
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Key-In Reminder . . .
Keyless Enter-N-Go .
Keyless Entry System
Keyless Go. . . . . . . .
Key, Programming . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.14
.37
.20
.12
.17
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX 665
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . .486
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . .
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator)
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.324
.318
.324
.631
.227
.253
.632
.632
.323
.321
.629
.318
.632
.227
.321
.317
.486
.124
.324
10
666 INDEX
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . .313 Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .318 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX 667
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
668 INDEX
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .498
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . .270
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .607
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .422
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX 669
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Removable Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . .
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . .
Safety Information, Tire . . . . .
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.121
.123
.651
.120
.491
.119
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . .68
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
670 INDEX
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .318
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .422
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX 671
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . .
Storage Bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
General Information . . . . . . . . .
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .77
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . .
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . .
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .434
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .497
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.123
.510
.502
.512
.555
.507
.502
.505
.503
.555
.510
.497
.515
.317
.653
.505
.511
.514
.491
10
672 INDEX
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight
Torque Converter Clutch . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-Hour Towing Assistance
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . .
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control Switch . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.493
.506
.556
.509
.547
.510
.491
.544
.471
.537
.161
.581
.543
.551
.543
.161
.472
.482
.482
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .27
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . .257
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .20
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX 673
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Uconnect威 (Hands-Free Phone). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Umbrella Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .377 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .313
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
674 INDEX
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Rear Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Windshield Defroster. . . .
Windshield Washers . . . .
Windshield Wiper Blades .
Wiper Blade Replacement
Wipers, Intermittent . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.122
.229
.602
.602
.229
Zone Control (Temperature Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .425
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s
electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals.
Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed
properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed
during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the
battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative
power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to
the negative battery connection. This connection should not be
fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the
rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas
with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation
of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away
from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded
coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low
Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal
may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic
systems.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Chrysler Group LLC
13Y531-126-AC
300
3rd Edition
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Printed in U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement